View
383
Download
83
Category
Tags:
Preview:
DESCRIPTION
NARI PCS 974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay
Citation preview
PCS-974
Transformer Auxiliary Relay
Instruction Manual
NR Electric Co., Ltd.
Preface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay I Date: 2013-05-17
Preface
Introduction
This guide and the relevant operating or service manual documentation for the equipment provide
full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment.
Documentation for equipment ordered from NR Electric Co., Ltd. is dispatched separately from
manufactured goods and may not be received at the same time. Therefore this guide is provided
to ensure that printed information normally present on equipment is fully understood by the
recipient.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with the contents of this
manual, and read relevant chapters carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the equipment. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.
Health and Safety
The information in this chapter of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that
equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of
the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger
personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.
Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,
proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and
servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.
Qualified personnel are individuals who:
Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the
system to which it is being connected;
Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety
engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to
isolate, ground, and label it;
Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering
practices;
Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
Preface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay II Date: 2013-05-17
Instructions and Warnings
The following indicators and standard definitions are used:
DANGER means that death, severe personal injury, or considerable equipment damage will
occur if safety precautions are disregarded.
WARNING means that death, severe personal, or considerable equipment damage could occur
if safety precautions are disregarded.
CAUTION means that light personal injury or equipment damage may occur if safety
precautions are disregarded. This particularly applies to damage to the device and to
resulting damage of the protected equipment.
WARNING!
The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify existing features, please
make sure that the version of this manual is compatible with the product in your hand.
WARNING!
During operation of electrical equipment, certain parts of these devices are under high voltage.
Severe personal injury or significant equipment damage could result from improper behavior.
Only qualified personnel should work on this equipment or in the vicinity of this equipment. These
personnel must be familiar with all warnings and service procedures described in this manual, as
well as safety regulations.
In particular, the general facility and safety regulations for work with high-voltage equipment must
be observed. Noncompliance may result in death, injury, or significant equipment damage.
DANGER!
Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be
opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage.
WARNING!
Exposed terminals
Do not touch the exposed terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high
voltage generated is dangerous
Residual voltage
Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the power supply. It
takes a few seconds for the voltage to discharge.
Preface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay III Date: 2013-05-17
CAUTION!
Earthing
The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed
Operating environment
The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient environment detailed in the
specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.
Ratings
Before applying AC voltage and current or the power supply to the equipment, check that they
conform to the equipment ratings.
Printed circuit board
Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when the power supply to the equipment is
on, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
External circuit
When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check
the supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.
Connection cable
Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.
Copyright
Version: 2.01
P/N: EN_YJBH5200.0086.0202
Copyright © NR 2013. All rights reserved
NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
69 Suyuan Avenue. Jiangning, Nanjing 211102, China
Tel: +86-25-87178185, Fax: +86-25-87178208
Website: www.nrelect.com, www.nari-relays.com
Email: nr_techsupport@nari-relays.com
We reserve all rights to this document and to the information contained herein. Improper use in particular reproduction and dissemination
to third parties is strictly forbidden except where expressly authorized.
The information in this manual is carefully checked periodically, and necessary corrections will be included in future editions. If
nevertheless any errors are detected, suggestions for correction or improvement are greatly appreciated.
We reserve the rights to make technical improvements without notice.
Preface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay IV Date: 2013-05-17
Preface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay V Date: 2013-05-17
Documentation Structure
The manual provides a functional and technical description of this relay and a comprehensive set
of instructions for the relay’s use and application.
The chapter contents are summarized as below:
1 Introduction
Briefly introduce the application, functions and features about this relay.
2 Technical Data
Introduce the technical data about this relay, such as electrical specifications, mechanical
specifications, ambient temperature and humidity range, communication port parameters, type
tests, setting ranges and accuracy limits and the certifications that our products have passed.
3 Operation Theory
Introduce a comprehensive and detailed functional description of all protective elements.
4 Supervision
Introduce the automatic self-supervision function of this relay.
5 Management
Introduce the management function (measurment and recording) of this relay.
6 Hardware
Introduce the main function carried out by each module of this relay and providing the definition of
pins of each module.
7 Settings
List settings including equipment settings, communication settings, description settings, display
settings, logic link settings and etc., and some notes about the setting application.
8 Human Machine Interface
Introduce the hardware of the human machine interface (HMI) module and a detailed guide for the
user how to use this relay through the HMI. It also lists all the information which can be view
through the HMI, such as settings, measurements, all kinds of reports etc.
9 Communication
Introduce the communication port and protocol which this relay can support, the IEC60970-5-103,
IEC61850 and DNP3.0 protocols are introduced in details.
10 Installation
Introduce the recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of this relay. A
guide to the mechanical and electrical installation of this relay is also provided, incorporating
Preface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay VI Date: 2013-05-17
earthing recommendations. A typical wiring connection to this relay is indicated.
11 Commissioning
Introduce how to commission this relay, comprising checks on the calibration and functionality of
this relay.
12 Maintenance
A general maintenance policy for this relay is outlined.
13 Decommissioning and Disposal
A general decommissioning and disposal policy for this relay is outlined.
14 Manual Version History
List the instruction manual version and the modification history records.
Typographic and Graphical Conventions
Deviations may be permitted in drawings and tables when the type of designator can be obviously
derived from the illustration.
The following symbols are used in drawings:
&
AND gate
≥1
OR gate
Comparator
BI
Binary signal via opto-coupler
SET I>
Input signal from comparator with setting
EN
Input signal of logic setting for function enabling
SIG
Input of binary signal except those signals via opto-coupler
OTH
Input of other signal
XXX
Output signal
Preface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay VII Date: 2013-05-17
t
t
Timer
Timer (optional definite-time or inverse-time characteristic)
10ms 0ms
Timer [delay pickup (10ms), delay dropoff (0ms), non-settable]
[t1] 0ms
Timer (t1: delay pickup, settable)
0ms [t2]
Timer (t2: delay dropoff, settable)
[t1] [t2]
Timer (t1: delay pickup, t2: delay dropoff, settable)
IDMT
Timer (inverse-time characteristic)
*
*
Instrument current transformer
Instrument voltage transformer
Preface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay VIII Date: 2013-05-17
1 Introduction
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 1-a
Date: 2013-05-17
1 Introduction
Table of Contents
1.1 Application ....................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Application ....................................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 Functions ......................................................................................................... 1-1
1.4 Features ............................................................................................................ 1-2
List of Figures
Figure 1.2-1 Typical Application ............................................................................................... 1-1
1 Introduction
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 1-b
Date: 2013-05-17
1 Introduction
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 1-1
Date: 2013-05-17
1.1 Application
1.2 Application
The PCS-974 relay is a transformer auxiliary relay applied for the protection of a transformer,
which provides mechanical protection, pole disagreement protection and breaker failure initiation.
Mechanical signal could be configured as thermal, gas, oil temperature, winding temperature,
pressure, oil level and so on.
52
52 52
PCS-974
DFRMR
MR: Mechanical protection
50BF: Breaker failure initiation
62PD: Pole disagreement protection
DFR: Disturbance&fault recorder
Mechanical signal
from transformer
50BF 62PD
Figure 1.2-1 Typical Application
1.3 Functions
Mechanical protection (26: oil and winding temperature; 63: gas, pressure; 71: oil level; etc)
Breaker failure initiation (50BF)
Pole disagreement protection (62PD)
CT circuit failure supervision(CTS)
Power supervision of mechanical protection
Self diagnostic test
GPS time synchronization
1 Introduction
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 1-2 Date: 2013-05-17
Perfect fault recording function
Event Recorder including 1024 status change of binary input reports, 1024 alarm
reports and 1024 latest user operation records
Disturbance recorder including 64 fault reports, and 64 waveforms, and file format of
waveform is compatible with international COMTRADE91 and COMTRADE99 file. Up to
200 binary inputs can be recorded, and three oscillograph triggering mode are
supported, which are protection triggering, manual triggering, remote triggering through
PCS-EXPLORER software.
Communication ports
RS-485 ports and Ethernet ports supporting with IEC 60870-5-103 or IEC 61850-8-1
protocol.
Rear RS-485 with clock synchronization.
One rear RS-232 or RS-485 with printer
One front RS-232 port for debuging
GOOSE communication function (optional module)
1.4 Features
On the premise of 24 samples per cycle, all data measurement, calculation and logic
discrimination could be done within one sampling period. The event recording and protection
logic calculation are completed simultaneously.
20x3 channels of mechanical signal input are provided for instantaneous tripping, and among
which 4x3 singnals for tripping with time delay.
Power supply of mechanical quantity input circuit is monitored.
Friendly HMI Interface
The HMI interface with a LCD and a 9-button keypad on the front panel is very friendly to the
user.
Various Clock Synchronizations
Various GPS clock synchronizations: PPS(pulse per second)/PPM(pulse per minitue),
message via communication ports and IRIG-B synchronization.
2 Technical Data
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 2-a Date: 2013-05-17
2 Technical Data
Table of Contents
2.1 Electrical Specifications ................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 Power Supply ..................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Binary Input ........................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.3 Binary Output ...................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Mechanical Specifications .............................................................................. 2-2
2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range .................................................. 2-2
2.4 Communication Port ....................................................................................... 2-2
2.4.1 EIA-485 Port ....................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.4.2 Ethernet Port ...................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.4.3 Optical Fibre Port ................................................................................................................ 2-3
2.4.4 Print Port ............................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port ................................................................................................. 2-3
2.5 Type Tests ........................................................................................................ 2-4
2.5.1 Environmental Tests ........................................................................................................... 2-4
2.5.2 Mechanical Tests ................................................................................................................ 2-4
2.5.3 Electrical Tests .................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility ............................................................................................ 2-4
2.6 Management Functions ................................................................................... 2-5
2.6.1 Clock Performance ............................................................................................................. 2-5
2.6.2 Binary Input Signal ............................................................................................................. 2-5
2.7 Protective Functions ....................................................................................... 2-5
2.7.1 Breaker Failure Initiation ..................................................................................................... 2-5
2.7.2 Pole Disagreement Protection ............................................................................................ 2-5
2.7.3 Mechanical Protection ........................................................................................................ 2-6
2.8 Certifications .................................................................................................... 2-6
2 Technical Data
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 2-b Date: 2013-05-17
2 Technical Data
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 2-1 Date: 2013-05-17
2.1 Electrical Specifications
2.1.1 Power Supply
Standard IEC 60255-11:2008
Rated Voltage 110Vdc/125Vdc, 220Vdc/250Vdc
Variation 80~300Vdc
Permissible AC ripple voltage ≤15% of the nominal auxiliary voltage
Burden
Quiescent condition
Operating condition
<25W
<30W
2.1.2 Binary Input
Rated Voltage 24Vdc 48Vdc 110Vdc 125Vdc 220Vdc 250Vdc
Rated current drain 1.2mA 2.4mA 1.1mA 1.25mA 2.2mA 2.5mA
Pickup voltage 13V~17V 26V~34V 60.5V~77V 70~87.5V 121V~154V
Dropout voltage 50% of pickup voltage
Maximum permissible voltage 100Vdc 300Vdc
Withstand voltage 2000Vac, 2800Vdc (continuously)
Resolving time for logic input <1ms
2.1.3 Binary Output
Output type Tripping contact Signal contact
Output mode Potential free contact
Continuous carry 5A@380Vac
5A@250Vdc
8A@380Vac
8A@250Vdc
Pickup time <8ms (typical 3ms) <10ms
Dropoff time <5ms <10ms
Breaking capacity (L/R=40ms)
0.65A@48Vdc
0.30A@110Vdc
0.15A@220Vdc
1.20A@48Vdc
0.50A@110Vdc
0.25A@220Vdc
Burden 300mW 400mW
Maximal system voltage 380Vac
250Vdc
380Vac
250Vdc
Test voltage across open
contact 1000V RMS for 1min 1000V RMS for 1min
Short duration current
6A@3s
15A@0.5s
30A@0.2s
10A@3s
20A@0.5s
30A@0.2s
Durability 10,000 operations minimum 10,000 operations minimum
NOTE! Signal output contacts include watchdog contacts.
2 Technical Data
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 2-2 Date: 2013-05-17
NOTE! Tripping output contacts are not connected to trip circuit breakers directly. They are
connected to interposing relays or lockout relays contacts which are connected to trip
circuit breakers.
2.2 Mechanical Specifications
Mounting Way Flush mounted
Housing color Silver grey
Weight per device Approx. 30 (kg)
Housing material Aluminum alloy
Location of terminal Rear panel of the device
Device structure Plug-in modular type @ rear side, integrated frontplate
Protection class
Standard IEC 60255-1:2009
Front side IP40, up to IP51 (With cover)
Other sides IP30
Rear side, connection
terminals IP20
2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range
Standard IEC 60225-1: 2009
Operating temperature -40°C to +70°C (Readability of display may be impaired below -20°C)
Transport and storage
temperature range -40°C to +70°C
Permissible humidity 5%-95%, without condensation
Pollution degree 2
Altitude <3000m
2.4 Communication Port
2.4.1 EIA-485 Port
Baud rate 4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103:1997
Maximal capacity 32
Transmission distance <500m
Safety level Isolation to ELV level
Twisted pair Screened twisted pair cable
2.4.2 Ethernet Port
Connector type RJ-45 ST, SC (Multi mode)
Transmission rate 100Mbits/s
2 Technical Data
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 2-3 Date: 2013-05-17
Transmission standard 10Base-T/100Base-TX 100Base-FX
Transmission distance <100m <2km (1310nm)
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103:1997, DNP 3.0 or IEC 61850
Safety level Isolation to ELV level
2.4.3 Optical Fibre Port
2.4.3.1 For Station Level
Characteristic Glass optical fiber
Connector type ST
Fibre type Multi mode
Transmission distance <2km
Wave length 1310nm
Transmission power Min. -20.0dBm
Minimum receiving power Min. -30.0dBm
Margin Min +3.0dB
2.4.3.2 For Process Level
Characteristic Glass optical fiber
Connector type LC
Fibre type Multi mode
Transmission distance <2km
Wave length 1310nm
Transmission power Min. -20.0dBm
Minimum receiving power Min. -30.0dBm
Margin Min +3.0dB
2.4.4 Print Port
Type RS-232
Baud Rate 4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s
Printer type EPSON® 300K printer
Safety level Isolation to ELV level
2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port
Type RS-485
Transmission distance <500m
Maximal capacity 32
Timing standard PPS, IRIG-B
Safety level Isolation to ELV level
2 Technical Data
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 2-4 Date: 2013-05-17
2.5 Type Tests
2.5.1 Environmental Tests
Dry cold test IEC60068-2-1:2007
Dry heat test IEC60068-2-2:2007
Damp heat test, cyclic Per IEC60068-2-30:2005
2.5.2 Mechanical Tests
Vibration IEC 60255-21-1:1988 Class I
Shock and bump IEC 60255-21-2:1988 Class I
2.5.3 Electrical Tests
Standard IEC 60255-27:2005
Dielectric tests Test voltage 2kV, 50Hz, 1min
Standard IEC 60255-5:2000
Impulse voltage tests Test voltage 5kV
Overvoltage category III
Insulation resistance
measurements Isolation resistance >100MΩ@500VDC
2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility
1MHz burst disturbance test
IEC 60255-22-1:2007
Common mode: class III 2.5kV
Differential mode: class III 1.0kV
Electrostatic discharge test
IEC60255-22-2:2008 class IV
For contact discharge: 8kV
For air discharge: 15kV
Radio frequency interference
tests
IEC 60255-22-3:2007 class III
Frequency sweep
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=80~1000MHz
Spot frequency
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=80MHz/160MHz/450MHz/900MHz
Radiated pulse-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=900MHz
Fast transient disturbance
tests
IEC 60255-22-4:2008
Power supply, I/O, Earth: class IV, 4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns
Communication terminals: class IV, 2kV, 5kHz, 5/50ns
Surge immunity test
Per IEC 60255-22-5:2008
Power supply, AC input, I/O port: class IV, 1.2/50us
Common mode: 4kV
Differential mode: 2kV
2 Technical Data
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 2-5 Date: 2013-05-17
Conducted RF
Electromagnetic Disturbance
IEC 60255-22-6:2001
Power supply, AC, I/O, Comm. Terminal: Class III, 10Vrms, 150 kHz~80MHz
Power Frequency Magnetic
Field Immunity
IEC 61000-4-8:2001
class V, 100A/m for 1min, 1000A/m for 3s
Pulse Magnetic Field Immunity IEC 61000-4-9:2001
class V, 6.4/16μs, 1000A/m for 3s
Damped oscillatory magnetic
field immunity
IEC 61000-4-10:2001
class V, 100kHz & 1MHz–100A/m
Auxiliary power supply
performance
IEC60255-11: 2008
Voltage dips: Up to 500ms for dips to 40% of rated voltage without reset
Voltage short interruptions: 100ms for interruption without rebooting
2.6 Management Functions
2.6.1 Clock Performance
Real time clock accuracy ≤ 3s/day
Accuracy of GPS synchronization ≤ 1ms
External time synchronization IRIG-B (200-98), PPS, SNTP protocol
2.6.2 Binary Input Signal
Resolution of binary input signal ≤ 1ms
Binary input mode Potential-free contact
Resolution of SOE ≤ 2ms
2.7 Protective Functions
2.7.1 Breaker Failure Initiation
Range of phase current setting 0.04A~150A
Range of zero sequence current setting 0.04A~150A
Range of negative sequence current setting 0.04A~150A
Time setting range 0s~360s
Current setting tolerance ≤2.5% of setting or 0.02In, whichever is greater
Time setting tolerance ≤1% of setting + 40ms
2.7.2 Pole Disagreement Protection
Time setting range 0s~360s
Time setting tolerance ≤1% of setting + 40ms
Control elements
Range of zero sequence current setting 0.04A~150A
Range of negative sequence current setting 0.04A~150A
Time setting range 0s~360s
2 Technical Data
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 2-6 Date: 2013-05-17
Current setting tolerance ≤2.5% of setting or 0.02In, whichever is greater
2.7.3 Mechanical Protection
Time setting range of MR1~MR4 0s ~1200s
Time setting tolerance ≤1% of setting+ 40ms
2.8 Certifications
ISO9001: 2008
ISO14001:2004
OHSAS18001: 2007
ISO10012:2003
CMMI L4
EMC: 2004/108/EC, EN50263:1999
Products safety(PS): 2006/95/EC, EN61010-1: 2001
3 Operation Theory
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 3-a Date: 2013-05-17
3 Operation Theory
Table of Contents
3.1 Mechanical Protection (MR) ............................................................................ 3-1
3.1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.2 Tripping Directly .................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.3 Tripping with Time Delay ..................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.4 Logic of MR Trip with Time Delay ....................................................................................... 3-3
3.2 Pole Disagreement Protection (PD) ............................................................... 3-4
3.2.1 Control Element .................................................................................................................. 3-5
3.2.2 Logic ................................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.3 Breaker Failure Initiation (50BF) .................................................................... 3-7
3.3.1 Operation Criteria ............................................................................................................... 3-7
3.3.2 Control Element .................................................................................................................. 3-8
3.3.3 Logic ................................................................................................................................... 3-8
3.4 CT Circuit Supervision (CTS) ......................................................................... 3-9
List of Figures
Figure 3.1-2 Trip Directly ........................................................................................................ 3-1
Figure 3.1-3 Trip with Time Delay .......................................................................................... 3-2
Figure 3.1-4 Logic of MR1 ...................................................................................................... 3-3
Figure 3.1-5 Logical of MR2 (or MR3) protection ................................................................. 3-4
Figure 3.2-1 Logical of pole disagreement protection ........................................................... 3-6
Figure 3.3-1 Logical diagram of breaker failure initiation .................................................... 3-8
3 Operation Theory
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 3-b Date: 2013-05-17
3 Operation Theory
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 3-1 Date: 2013-05-17
3.1 Mechanical Protection (MR)
3.1.1 Overview
When the mechanical signal from transformer mechanical relay (MR) arrives at PCS-974, it
repeats the mechanical signal to annunciation signal, remote signal, and disturbance&fault
recording (DFR) signal, and trip signals. Simultaneously, the relay stores the state change of a
binary input of MR signal, the repeated alarm signal and the repeated operation signal.
According to the difference of the importance of mechanical signals transformer MR protection, the
mechanical signals are classified into three groups: mechanical signals for warning, mechanical
signals for tripping with delay, and mechanical signals for direct tripping.
For the mechanical signal for warning, such as light gas signal, the relay repeats the mechanical
signal for those warning signals. For the mechanical signal for tripping with delay, besides those
warning signals, the relay issues tripping signal with time delay to make tripping output relay
operate simultaneously. For the mechanical signals for direct tripping, besides those warning
signals, the relay issues tripping signal directly simultaneously.
Mechanical signals MR1~MR20 (three phase signals) of PCS-974FG relay are not controlled by
the relay’s CPU, which means that when the mechanical signal arrives, the relay will issue the
corresponding warning signals. Besides, the relay can operate to trip directly at the same time if
the input terminals of RLY module are connected to the corresponding tripping signal contact.
Besides, among 20x3 mechanical signals, mechanical signal MR1~MR4 (three phase signals) can
be controlled by the relay CPU, i.e. those mechanical signals are repeated to trip after a delay with
warning signals being issued simultaneously.
3.1.2 Tripping Directly
When any of mechanical signals (MR1~MR20, three phase signals) arrives at the PCS-974FG, it
requires the device to initiate a trip command immediately without any time delay. The wiring
schematic is seen in Figure 3.1-1. As soon as the normal open contact of transformer MR is closed,
the PCS-974FG starts trip command right away. At the same time, the device issues annunciation
signal, remote signal and DFR signal via corresponding terminals.
Tripping
Contact from
Transformer MR
AUX-
Annunciation Signal
Remote Signal
DFR Signal
Figure 3.1-1 Trip Directly
3 Operation Theory
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 3-2 Date: 2013-05-17
NOTE: When any one phase signal of the mechanical signals MR1, MR2, … MR20
arrive, associated normal open contact of binary output relay is closed to issue a trip
command. It will not drop off until the mechanical signal is gone.
3.1.3 Tripping with Time Delay
Occasionally, when some mechanical fault happens, such as power failure of transformer cooling
system, after the fault is isolated by associated MR, it allows the transformer to continue operating
for a certain time that is decided by transformer characteristics, customers’ application standard,
etc. Consequently, this group of mechanical signals (MR1~M04, three phase signals) is used in an
application where it needs a time delay from the PCS-974FG receiving the mechanical fault signal
to it initiating a trip command. The wiring schematic is proposed in Figure 3.1-2.
Contact from
Transformer MR
Delay
AUX+ AUX-
RELAY
Internal+Internal-
1
2
Tripping
Annunciation Signal
FDR Signal
Remote Signal
Figure 3.1-2 Trip with Time Delay
Once the normal open contact of transformer MR is closed, a normal open contact 1 of the relay is
closed to conduct the optical coupler. After a configurable time delay, normal open contact 2 is
closed by the special processing circuit to initiate a trip command to open CB and issue several
alarm annunciation signals.
NOTE: When any one phase signal of the mechanical signals MR1~MR4 arrives,
associated normal open contact of binary output relay is closed after a time delay or
3 Operation Theory
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 3-3 Date: 2013-05-17
without time delay to issue a trip command. It will not drop off until the mechanical signal
is gone.
3.1.4 Logic of MR Trip with Time Delay
PCS-974FG provides four MR trip elements with time delay, MR1, MR2, MR3 and MR4. The
protection logical diagram of MR1 is slightly different from the others, and operation logic of phase
A of MR1 signal is shown in Figure 3.1-3.
3.1.4.1 Logic of MR1 protection
&
&
≥1
&
&
[MR1.Op]
≥1
&
&
BI [BI_EnDlyMR]
LINK [Link_EnDlyMR]
SET [MR1.En_FixDly]
BI [BI_PhA_MR01]
SET [MR1.En_OpDly]
SET [MR1.En_MR14CtrlMR1]
BI [BI_PhA_MR14]
[MR1.t_OpDly] 0ms
[MR1.t_FixDly] 0ms
Figure 3.1-3 Logic of MR1
Where:
[BI_EnDlyMR]: the binary input of enabling mechanical protection with time delay.
[Link_EnDlyMR]: the logic link of enabling mechanical protection with time delay.
[MR1.En_FixDly]: the logic setting of enabling MR1 protection to issue a trip command after the
fixed time delay [MR1.t_FixDly].
[MR1.En_OpDly]: the logic setting of enabling MR1 protection to issue a trip command after the
time delay [MR1.t_OpDly].
[MR1.En_MR14CtrlMR1]: the logic setting of enabling binary input of MR14 to control MR1
protection.
[BI_PhA_MR01]: the binary input of MR1 signal from transformer mechanical protection.
[BI_PhA_MR14]: the binary input of MR14 signal from transformer mechanical protection.
[MR1.t_FixDly]: the fixed delay of MR1 for tripping.
[MR1.t_OpDly]: the time delay of MR1 for tripping.
[MR1.Op]: MR1 mechanical protection operating to issued trip command.
MR1 has two kinds of time delay, [MR1.t_FixDly] and [MR1.t_OpDly]. They can be used
separately or in cooperation. There are following three modes of MR1 protection by configuring
3 Operation Theory
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 3-4 Date: 2013-05-17
logic settings.
(1) When [MR1.En_FixDly] is set as “1” and MR1 arrives, after a delay of [MR1.t_FixDly],
PCS-974FG initiates a trip command to CB.
(2) When [MR1.En_OpDly] is set as “1” and [MR1.En _MR14CtrlMR1] is set as “0”, MR1
protection is out of control of MR14 signal and [MR1.t_OpDly] has the same meaning as
[MR1.t_FixDly].
(3) When both [MR1.En_OpDly] and [MR1.En _MR14CtrlMR1] are set as “1”, MR1 protection is
under the control of MR14 signal. As MR1 arrives and hold for [MR1.t_OpDly], if
[BI_PhA_MR14] is still “0”, MR1 protection is blocked by MR10 signal to issue a trip command
to CB. If MR1 signal arrives and hold for [MR1.t_OpDly], now supposing that [BI_PhA_MR14]
is “1”, PCS-974FG initiates a trip command.
In this cooperation way, [MR1.t_FixDly] should be set longer than [MR1.t_OpDly]. Otherwise,
[MR1.t_OpDly] will not actually function.
3.1.4.2 Logic of MR2~MR4
MR2, MR3 and MR4 have same protection logic with independent settings and here phase A of
MR2 is taken as an example to protection logic.
&
[MR2.Op]
SET [MR2.En_FixDly]
[MR2.t_FixDly] 0ms
BI [BI_EnDlyMR]
LINK [Link_EnDlyMR]
BI [BI_PhA_MR02]
&
Figure 3.1-4 Logic diagram of MR2 (or MR3, MR4) protection
Where:
[MR2.En_FixDly]: the logic setting of enabling MR2 protection to issue a trip command after the
delay [MR2.t_FixDly].
[BI_PhA_MR02]: the binary input of MR2 signal from transformer mechanical protection;
[BI_EnDlyMR]: the binary input of enabling mechanical protection with time delay.
[Link_EnDLyMR]: the logic link of enabling mechanical protection with time delay.
[MR2.t_FixDly]: the time delay of MR2 protection for tripping;
[MR2.Op]: MR2 protection operating to issued trip command.
3.2 Pole Disagreement Protection (PD)
With voltage level involved, the switching equipment usually consists of single pole devices that
3 Operation Theory
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 3-5 Date: 2013-05-17
are not mechanically linked, with each pole having an independent operating mechanism. With
such an arrangement, the possibility exists that one pole may not operate coincidentally with the
other poles, thus creating an undesirable imbalance in system voltages or, in case the switching
equipment were called upon to clear a fault, might fail to remove the faulted source from service.
So that if a pole disagreement fault is detected, after a certain delay, PCS-974FG will initiate a trip
command to trip all poles of the switching equipment.
3.2.1 Control Element
PCS-974FG provides three kinds of overcurrent control elements for pole disagreement protection:
phase overcurrent element, residual overcurrent element and negative-sequence overcurrent
element which are configurable by logic settings and are “OR” relation to release pole
disagreement protection.
Ipmax>[62PD.Ip_Set]
or 3I0>[62PD.3I0_Set]
or I2>[62PD.I2_Set]
Equation 3.2-1
Where:
Ipmax: the maximum value of phase current.
3I0: the calculated residual current.
I2: the negative-sequence current.
[62PD.Ip_Set]: the current setting of phase overcurrent element for pole disagreement protection.
[62PD.3I0_Set]: the current setting of residual overcurrent element for pole disagreement
protection.
[62PD.I2_Set]: the current setting of negative-sequence overcurrent element for pole
disagreement protection,.
The binary input of three-pole tripping from external relay ([BI_ExTCtrlPD2]) is used to control
delay 2 of pole disagreement protection.
3.2.2 Logic
The logical of pole disagreement protection is shown in the following figure.
3 Operation Theory
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 3-6 Date: 2013-05-17
[62PD.Op_t2]
SIG 3I0>[62PD.3I0_Set]
SET [62PD.En_3I0]
SET [62PD.En_I2]
SIG I2>[62PD.I2_Set]
BI [BI_PD]
SET [62PD.En_t1]
BI [BI_En62PD]
LINK [Link_En62PD]
&
≥1
&
≥1
&
&
&
SIG 3I0>[62PD.3I0_Set]
SET [62PD.En_3I0]
SET [62PD.En_I2]
BI [BI_PD]
SET [62PD.En_t2]
BI [BI_En62PD]
LINK [Link_En62PD]
&
&
BI [BI_ExTCtrlPD2]
SET [62PD.En_ExTrp_t2]
SIG Ipmax>[62PD.Ip_Set]
SET [62PD.En_Ip_t2]
SIG I2>[62PD.I2_Set]]
≥1
≥1
&
&
&
≥1
≥1
&
[62PD.t2_Op] 0ms
[62PD.t2_Op] 0ms [62PD.Op_t1]
Figure 3.2-1 Logic diagram of pole disagreement protection
Where:
Ipmax, 3I0, I2, [62PD.Ip_Set], [62PD.3I0_Set] and [62PD.I2_Set]: same meanings as those
mentioned in above section.
[62PD.En_3I0]: the logic setting of enabling pole disagreement protection being controlled by
residual overcurrent element.
3 Operation Theory
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 3-7 Date: 2013-05-17
[62PD.En_I2]: the logic setting of enabling pole disagreement protection being controlled by
zero-sequence overcurrent element.
[62PD.En_Ip_t2]: the logic setting of enabling delay 2 of pole disagreement protection being
controlled by phase overcurrent element.
[62PD.En_t1]: the logic setting of enabling delay 1 of pole disagreement protection.
[62PD.En_t2]: the logic setting of enabling delay 2 of pole disagreement protection.
[BI_PD]: the binary input of pole disagreement position of circuit breaker.
[BI_En62PD]: the binary input of enabling pole disagreement protection.
[Link_En62PD]: the logic link of enabling pole disagreement protection.
[62PD.En_ExTrp_t2]: the logic setting of enabling delay 2 of pole disagreement protection being
controlled by binary input of three-pole tripping from external relay.
[BI_ExTCtrlPD2]: the binary input of three-pole tripping from external relay.
[62PD.t1]: the time delay of delay 1 of pole disagreement protection.
[62PD.t2]: the time delay of delay 2 of pole disagreement protection.
[62PD.Op_t1]: the delay 1 of pole disagreement protection operates to issue tripping command.
[62PD.Op_t2]: the delay 2 of pole disagreement protection operates to issue tripping command.
3.3 Breaker Failure Initiation (50BF)
This function is specifically used to detect breaker failure which is that breaker fails to be tripped to
clear fault after it receives tripping command. After breaker failure is detected, contacts of initiating
breaker failure initiation are sent out to external relay which is responsible for issuing tripping
command.
3.3.1 Operation Criteria
Breaker failure initiation in PCS-974FG is initiated by one of three elements: phase overcurrent
element, residual current element or negative sequence current element. Followings are criteria of
those elements:
Ipmax >[50BF.Ip_Set]
3I0>[50BF.3I0_Set]
I2 >[50BF.I2_Set]
Equation 3.3-1
Where:
Ipmax: the maximum value of phase current.
3I0: the calculated residual current.
3 Operation Theory
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 3-8 Date: 2013-05-17
I2: the negative-sequence current.
[62PD.Ip_Set]: the current setting of phase overcurrent element breaker failure initiation.
[62PD.3I0_Set]: the current setting of residual overcurrent element for breaker failure initiation.
[62PD.I2_Set]: the current setting of negative-sequence overcurrent element for breaker failure
initiation.
3.3.2 Control Element
It is configurable whether the breaker failure initiation is blocked by any one of following contacts:
pole disagreement position ([BI_PD]), closed state of breaker auxiliary contact ([BI_52a]) or
external tripping signal ( [BI_ExTCtrBFI]).
3.3.3 Logic
PCS-974FG provides two delays for breaker failure initiation, and the corresponding logic diagram
is shown below.
[50BF.Op_t2][50BF.t2_Op] 0ms
BI [BI_ExTCtrlBFI]
≥1
SET [50BF.En_ExTrp_Ctrl]
BI [BI_52a]
≥1
SET [50BF.En_52a_Ctrl]
BI [BI_PD]
≥1
SET [50BF.En_PD_Ctrl]
SIG 3I0>[50BF.3I0_Set]
SET [50BF.En_3I0]
SET [50BF.En_I2]
SIG Ipmax>[62PD.Ip_Set]
SIG I2>[50BF.I2_Set]]
&
&
≥1
EN [50BF.En]
BI [BI_En50BF]
LINK [Link_En50BF]
&
&
&
&
SET [50BF.En_t2]
&
&
SET [50BF.En_t1]
[50BF.Op_t1][50BF.t1_Op] 0ms
Figure 3.3-1 Logic diagram of breaker failure initiation
Where:
Ipmax, 3I0, I2, [50BF.Ip_Set], [50BF.3I0_Set] and [50BF.I2_Set]: same meanings as those
3 Operation Theory
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 3-9 Date: 2013-05-17
mentioned in above section.
[50BF.En_t1]: the logic setting of enabling delay 1 of breaker failure initiation.
[50BF.En_t2]: the logic setting of enabling delay 2 of breaker failure initiation.
[50BF.En_ExTrp_Ctrl]: the logic setting of enabling binary input [BI_ExTCtrlBFI] to control breaker
failure initiation.
[BI_ExTCtrlBFI]: the binary input of external tripping contact from other protection equipment.
[50BF.En_PD_Ctrl]: the logic setting of enabling binary input [BI_PD] to control breaker failure
initiation.
[BI_PD]: the binary input of pole disagreement position of circuit breaker.
[50BF.En_52a_Ctrl]: the logic setting of enabling binary input [BI_52a] to control breaker failure
initiation.
[BI_52a]: the binary input of normally open auxiliary contact of circuit breaker.
[50BF.En]: the logic setting of enabling breaker failure initiation.
[50BF.En_3I0]: the logic setting of enabling breaker failure initiation being controlled by residual
overcurrent element.
[50BF.En_I2]: the logic setting of enabling breaker failure initiation being controlled by
negative-sequence overcurrent element.
[BI_En50BF]: the binary input of enabling breaker failure initiation.
[Link_En50BF]: the logic link of enabling breaker failure initiation.
[50BF.t1]: the time delay of delay 1 of breaker failure initiation.
[50BF.t2]: the time delay of delay 2 of breaker failure initiation.
[50BF.Op_t1]: the delay 1 of breaker failure initiation operates to issue tripping command.
[50BF.Op_t2]: the delay 2 of breaker failure initiation operates to issue tripping command.
3.4 CT Circuit Supervision (CTS)
If negative sequence current is greater than 0.1In (In is the secondary rated current.) or residual
current is greater than 0.06In over 10s, the device will issue an alarm message as [AlmL_CTS] on
LCD. For the meantime, LED “ALARM” is lit on and associated normal open contacts of
equipment alarm relay are closed to issue annunciation signal, remote signal and event recording.
This alarm information can also be sent to SCADA by communication port. At this time, the device
can also endure on service.
The LED “ALARM” will be extinguished automatically 10s later after the three-phase current
returns to normal state.
3 Operation Theory
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 3-10 Date: 2013-05-17
4 Supervision
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 4-a Date: 2013-05-17
4 Supervision
Table of Contents
4.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Relay Self-supervision .................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.1 Relay Hardware Supervision .............................................................................................. 4-1
4.2.2 Output Circuit Supervision .................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2.3 Setting Checking ................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.2.4 Memory Checking ............................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2.5 Opto-coupler Power Supervision ........................................................................................ 4-2
4.2.6 Fault Detector Element Supervision ................................................................................... 4-2
4.2.7 Test Mode Supervision ....................................................................................................... 4-2
4.3 Equipment Operation Supervision ................................................................. 4-2
4.3.1 Current Transformer Supervision (CTS) ............................................................................. 4-2
4.4 Failure and Abnormality Alarms ..................................................................... 4-3
4.4.1 Hardware Self-supervision Alarms ...................................................................................... 4-3
4.4.2 Equipment Operation Alarms .............................................................................................. 4-7
List of Tables
Table 4.4-1 Equipment self-check alarm list ........................................................................... 4-3
Table 4.4-2 Equipment operation alarm list ............................................................................. 4-7
4 Supervision
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 4-b Date: 2013-05-17
4 Supervision
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 4-1 Date: 2013-05-17
4.1 Overview
Though the protection system is in non-operating state under normal conditions, it is waiting for a
power system fault to occur at any time and must operate for the fault without fail. When
equipment is in energizing process before the LED “HEALTHY” is on, the equipment needs to be
checked to ensure no errors. Therefore, the automatic supervision function, which checks the
health of the protection system when startup and during normal operation, plays an important role.
The numerical relay based on the microprocessor operations is suitable for implementing this
automatic supervision function of the protection system.
In case a fatal fault is detected during automatic supervision, the equipment will be blocked. It
means that relay is out of service. Before you must re-energize the relays or reset CPU module
and MON module to make relay back into service, please find out the cause and inform the
factory.
When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed with an LCD message, LED
indication and alarm contact outputs. At the same time event recording will record the failure alarm
which can be viewed in event recording report and be printed.
4.2 Relay Self-supervision
4.2.1 Relay Hardware Supervision
All chips on each module are monitored to ensure whether they are damaged or have errors. If
any one of them is detected damaged or having error, the corresponding alarm signal
[ProtBrd.Fail_DSP] or [FDBrd.Fail_DSP] is issued with equipment being blocked.
AC current inputs are monitored and if the samples are detected to be wrong or inconsistent, an
alarm [ProtBrd.Fail_Sampel] or [FDBrd.Fail_Sample] will be issued and the relay will be blocked.
4.2.2 Output Circuit Supervision
State of binary outputs on each BO module at slot BXX(XX is the slot number) is continuously
monitored.
If any abnormality is detected on the module and the output contact for tripping, the corresponding
alarm signal [BXX.Fail_Output] will be issued with equipment being blocked.
If any abnormality is detected on the module and the output contact for signal, the corresponding
alarm signal [BXX.Alm_Output] will be issued without equipment being blocked.
4.2.3 Setting Checking
This relay has 10 setting groups, while only one is active at the same time. The settings of active
setting group are checked to ensure they are reasonable. If settings are checked to be
unreasonable or out of setting scopes, a corresponding alarm signal will be issued, and the
protective device is also blocked.
4 Supervision
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 4-2 Date: 2013-05-17
4.2.4 Memory Checking
Data in non-volatile memory, which are not changed after device energized, are always checked
during device normal operation, such as settings, pointers, etc. If these data changed abnormally,
the corresponding alarm [ProtBrd.Memory] or [FDBrd.Memory] will be issued.
4.2.5 Opto-coupler Power Supervision
Positive power supply of opto-coupler on each BI module at slot XX is continuously monitored, and
if a failure or damage on the module is detected, then the alarm signal [BXX.Alm_OptoDC] will be
issued.
4.2.6 Fault Detector Element Supervision
If any fault detector picks up to trigger oscillography function, the corresponding binary input
changing report will be recorded in “IO Events” menu with tripping report [TrigDFR] being issued.
If a fault detector for protection or fault detector calculation keeps picking up for 10s, the
corresponding alarm signal [ProtBrd.Alm_PersistPkp] or [FDBrd.Alm_Pkp] will be issued without
equipment being blocked.
4.2.7 Test Mode Supervision
When protection equipment is in communication test mode the alarm signal [Alm_CommTest] is
issued without blocking equipment.
4.3 Equipment Operation Supervision
4.3.1 Current Transformer Supervision (CTS)
The CTS function will be always processed all the time, which includes following two aspects
The CTS logic in the relay is designed to detect the CT secondary circuit to ensure that current
measurement is the actual value of power system. The main purpose of the CTS function is to
ensure the integrity of the CT circuits maintaining the performance of protective equipment.
If negative sequence current is greater than 0.1In (In is the secondary rated current.) or residual
current is greater than 0.06In over 10s, the device will issue an alarm message as [AlmL_CTS] on
LCD. For the meantime, LED “ALARM” is lit on and associated normal open contacts of
equipment alarm relay are closed to issue annunciation signal, remote signal and event recording.
This alarm information can also be sent to SCADA by communication port. At this time, the device
can also endure on service.
The LED “ALARM” will be extinguished automatically 10s later after the three-phase current
returns to normal state.
4 Supervision
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 4-3 Date: 2013-05-17
4.4 Failure and Abnormality Alarms
NOTE:Following alarm messages and corresponding LED indicators are fixed in
equipment software. Besides, there are other programmable LED indicators configured
according to user requirement.
4.4.1 Hardware Self-supervision Alarms
Equipment hardware circuits and software working conditions are always monitored by the relay. If
any abnormality occurs, the corresponding alarm message will be issued on the LCD of the
equipment.
When some light failures are detected, part of protection functions probably be disabled and
others can still work. Some server failures of hardware or software will result in the equipment
being blocked and the contacts of equipment failure will operate at same time. During that
condition, the protection relay has to be out of service for maintenance.
NOTE:If an alarm signal is issued with equipment being blocked, please try to make a fault
diagnosis by referring the issued alarm messages but not to simply reboot or re-power the
relay. If user cannot find the failure reason on site, please inform manufacturer for
maintenance.
Table 4.4-1 Equipment self-check alarm list
No. Alarm Message Meaning Description
1 Alm_Device The device is abnormal.
2 Alm_CommTest The device is in the communication test mode.
3 Alm_TimeSyn Time synchronization abnormality alarm.
4 Alm_Version The error is found during checking the version of software
downloaded to the device.
5 Alm_Settings_MON The error is found during MON module checking settings of
device.
6 BI_Maintenance The device is in maintenance state.
7 Alm_BI_SettingGrp The active group set by settings in device and that set by
binary input are not matched
8 BXX.Alm_OptoDC The power supply of BXX binary input module is abnormal.
9 ProtBrd.Alm_PersistPkp The duration of pickup of any fault detector for protection
calculation is in excess of 10s.
10 FDBrd.Alm_PersistPkp The duration of pickup of any fault detector for fault detector
calculation is in excess of 10s.
11 ProtBrd.Alm_PersistBlk The protection logic of protection module keeps being blocked
over 10s.
4 Supervision
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 4-4 Date: 2013-05-17
No. Alarm Message Meaning Description
12 FDBrd.Alm_PersistBlk The protection logic of fault detector module keeps being
blocked over 10s.
13 Bxx.Alm_Output Driving circuits of binary output relays for singal on the BXX
module are damaged.
14 Bxx.Alm There is abnormality detected on the BXX module.
When No.1~No.14 messages are issued on the LCD of the relay, the LED “HEALTHY” is steady green and
the protection equipment is not blocked with the LED “ALARM” being lit.
15 Fail_Device The device fails.
16 Fail_Setting_OvRange Setting values are out of range.
17 Fail_BoardConfig Mismatch between the configuration of plug-in boards and the
designing drawing of an applied-specific project.
18 Fail_SettingItem_Chgd After configuration file is updated, settings of the file and
settings saved on the device are not matched.
19 ProtBrd.Fail_Settings Error is found during checking settings for protection
calculation.
20 FDBrd.Fail_Settings Error is found during checking settings for fault detector
calculation.
21 ProtBrd.Fail_Memory Error is found during checking the memory data for protection
calculation.
22 FDBrd.Fail_Memory Error is found during checking the memory data for fault
detector calculation.
23 ProtBrd.Fail_Sample Sample values for protection calculation are abnormal.
24 FDBrd.Fail_Sample Sample values for fault detector calculation are abnormal.
25 ProtBrd.Fail_Config Software configuration for protection calculation is found
incorrectly.
26 FDBrd.Fail_Config Software configuration for fault detector calculation is found
incorrectly.
27 ProtBrd.Fail_DSP DSP chip for protection calculation is damaged.
28 FDBrd.Fail_DSP DSP chip for fault detector calculation is damaged.
29 Bx.Fail_Output Driving circuits of binary output relays for tripping on the BXX
module are damaged.
When No.18~No.29 messages are issued on the LCD, the LED “HEALTHY” is extinguished, and the
protection equipment is blocked at the same time, but the LED “ALARM” is not lit.
Handling suggestion:
1. No.1, No.15: The signal is always issued with other specific alarm signals, and please refer to
the handling suggestion of other specific alarm signals.
2. No.2: No special treatment is needed. Just wait the completion of communication test., or exit
4 Supervision
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 4-5 Date: 2013-05-17
the test.
3. No.3: Step1: check whether the selected clock synchronization mode matches the clock
synchronization source;
Step 2: check whether the wiring connection between the equipment and the clock
synchronization source is correct
Step 3: check whether the setting for selecting clock synchronization (i.e. [Opt_TimeSyn]) is
set correctly. If there is no clock synchronization, please set the setting [Opt_TimeSyn] as “No
TimeSyn”.
After the abnormality is removed, the “ALARM” LED will be extinguished and the
corresponding alarm message will disappear and the equipment will restore to normal
operation state.
4. No.4: Users may pay no attention to the alarm signal in the project commissioning stage, but it
is needed to download the latest package file (including correct version checksum file)
provided by R&D engineer to make the alarm signal disappear. Then users get the correct
software version. It is not allowed that the alarm signal is issued on the device already has
been put into service. the devices having being put into service so that the alarm signal
disappears
5. No.6: After maintenance is finished, please de-energized the binary input [BI_Maintenance]
and then the alarm will disappear and the equipment restore to normal operation state.
6. No.7: Please check the value of setting [Active_Grp] and binary input of indicating active
group, and make them matched. Then the “ALARM” LED will be extinguished and the
corresponding alarm message will disappear and the equipment will restore to normal
operation state.
7. No. 8: Step 1: check whether the binary input module is connected to the power supply.
Step 2: check whether the voltage of power supply is in the required range.
After the voltage for binary input module restores to normal range, the “ALARM” LED will be
extinguished and the corresponding alarm message will disappear and the equipment will
restore to normal operation state.
8. No.9~No.10: Please check secondary values and protection settings. If settings are not set
reasonable to make fault detectors pick up, please reset settings, and then the alarm
message will disappear and the equipment will restore to normal operation state.
NOTE! Tripping out contacts are blocked in 1s after a transformer relay is energized with
“HEALTHY” LED indicator being lit. This situation is decided as a relay fault, and the alarm
signal [ProtBrd.Alm_Pkp] and [FDBrd.Alm_Pkp] will be issued after tripping output contacts
keeps on picking up over10s.
9. No.11~No.12: If [BXX.Alm_OptoDC] alarm message is issued together, please do as the
handleing suggestion for No.8. If the alarm message [ProtBrd.Alm_PersistBlk] or
4 Supervision
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 4-6 Date: 2013-05-17
[FDBrd.Alm_PersistBlk] is still issued without the message [BXX.Alm_OptoDC], please check
the hardware of device.
10. No.13, No.29: Please re-insert the corresponding binary output module and re-power the
equipment after the completion of insertion, and the equipment will restore to normal
operation state.
11. No.14: The signal is always issued with other specific alarm signals, and please refer to the
handling suggestion of other specific alarm signals. If only this alarm is issued, please replace
the module.
12. No.16: Please reset setting values according to the range described in the instruction manual,
then re-power or reboot the equipment and the alarm message will disappear and the
equipment will restore to normal operation state.
13. No.17: Step 1: Go to the menu “Information”->”Board Info”, check the abnormality
information.
Step 2: For the abnormality board, if the board is not used, then remove, and if the board is
used, then check whether the board is installed properly and work normally.
After the abnormality is removed, re-power or reboot the equipment and the equipment will
restore to normal operation state.
14. No.18: Please check the settings mentioned in the prompt message on the LCD, and go to
the menu “Settings” and select “Confirm Settings” item to confirm settings. Then, the
equipment will restore to normal operation stage.
15. No.19, No.20: Step 1: Check CT ratio settings of each side of transformer to be set in proper
range, and if need, please reset those settings and reboot or re-power the equipment.
Step 2: Check overexcitation settings to be set reasonable, and if need, please reset those
settings and reboot or re-power the equipment.
Step 3: After above two steps, abnormality may disappear. Otherwise, a hardware failure
probably occurs and please inform the manufacture or the agent.
16. No.5, No.21, No.22: Please inform the manufacture or the agent for maintenance.
17. No.23, No.24: Step 1: Please make the equipment out of service.
Step 2: Then check if the analog input modules and wiring connectors connected to those
modules are installed at the position.
Step 3: Re-power the equipment and the equipment will restore to normal operation state.
18. No.25, No.26: Please inform configuration engineers to check and confirm visualization
functions of the device
19. No.27, No.28: Chips are damaged and please inform the manufacturer or the agent to replace
the module.
4 Supervision
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 4-7 Date: 2013-05-17
NOTE! If the equipment still cannot restore to normal operation state after suggested
procedures, please inform the manufacture or the agent for maintenance.
4.4.2 Equipment Operation Alarms
During the equipment normal operation, CT circuit and some binary input circuits are always
monitored by the relay. If any abnormality of them occurs or any alarm element operates, the
corresponding alarm message will be issued on the LCD of the equipment without blocking
equipment and “ALARM” LED is lit at the same time.
When this kind of alarm messages are issued, user need to find the abnormality reason, and then
take corresponding measures to eliminate the alarm message to make the equipment return to the
normal operation state.
Table 4.4-2 Equipment operation alarm list
No. Alarm Message Meaning Description
1 AlmL_CTS CT secondary circuit is abnormal.
2 Alm_BI_ExTCtrlBFI Binary input of tripping signal for controlling breaker failure initiation
(i.e. [BI_ExTCtrlBFI]) keeps being energized over 3s.
3 Alm_BI_ExTCtrlPD2 Binary input of tripping signal for controlling delay 2 of pole
disagreement (i.e. [BI_ExTCtrlBFI]) keeps being energized over 3s.
4 Alm_BI_PD Binary input of pole disagreement of circuit breaker. (i.e.
[BI_ExTCtrlBFI]) keeps being energized over 10s.
Handling suggestion:
1. No.1: Please check the corresponding CT secondary circuit. After the abnormality is
eliminated, “ALARM” LED will go off automatically and equipment returns to normal operation
state.
2. No.2~No.4 Check the corresponding binary input circuit. (No.2~No.4).
4 Supervision
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 4-8 Date: 2013-05-17
5 Management
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 5-a Date: 2013-05-17
5 Management
Table of Contents
5.1 General Description......................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Measurement ................................................................................................... 5-1
5.3 Event & fault Records ..................................................................................... 5-1
5.3.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.3.2 Event Recording ................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.3.3 Disturbance and Fault Recording ....................................................................................... 5-2
5.3.4 Present Recording .............................................................................................................. 5-3
5 Management
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 5-b Date: 2013-05-17
5 Management
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 5-1 Date: 2013-05-17
5.1 General Description
The relay also provides some auxiliary functions, such as on-line data metering, binary input
status, event and disturbance recording, etc. All these make the relay meet the demands of the
modern power grid requirements.
5.2 Measurement
The equipment performs continuous measurement of the analogue input quantities. The
measurement data shown below is displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on the local or
remote PC.
Equipment samples 24 points per cycle. Calculate the RMS value in each interval and LCD will be
updated every 0.5 second.
5.3 Event & fault Records
5.3.1 Introduction
The protection equipment provides the following recording functions:
Event recording
DFR
Present recording
All the recording information except waveform can be viewed on local LCD or by printing.
Waveform must be printed or be extracted by using PCS-Explorer software and a waveform
software.
5.3.2 Event Recording
The equipment can store 1024 abnormality alarm reports, 1024 binary input stage changing
reports respectively. All the records are stored in non-volatile memory, and when the available
space is exhausted, the oldest report will be automatically overwritten by the latest one
Abnormality alarm reports
An abnormality alarm being detected during relay self-check supervision or an alarm of secondary
circuit abnormality or protection alarm element will also be logged as individual events.
Binary input status changing reports
When binary input status changes, the change information will be displayed on LCD and logged as
binary input change report at the same time.
5 Management
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 5-2 Date: 2013-05-17
5.3.3 Disturbance and Fault Recording
5.3.3.1 Application
Use the disturbance recorder to achieve a better understanding of the behavior of the power
network and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. An analysis
of the recorded data provides valuable information that can be used to improve existing equipment.
This information can also be used when planning for new installations.
5.3.3.2 Design
Disturbance recorder is consisted of tripping report and fault waveform. Disturbance recorder is
triggered by fault detectors. The equipment can store 64 pieces of trip reports and waveforms in
non-volatile memory.
When protection operates, the operating information will be displayed on LCD and logged as trip
record at same time, which can be viewed in trip report. Here fault recording includes two kinds of
cases:
1) Only the fault detector element operates.
2) The fault detector element operates associated with the operation of protective elements.
1. Trip record capacity and information
The equipment can store 64 pieces of trip reports in non-volatile memory. If a new fault occurs
when 64 faults have been stored, the oldest will be overwritten by the latest one..
The following items are recorded for one fault:
1) Sequence number
Each operation will be recorded with a sequence number in the report and displayed on LCD
screen.
2) Date and time of fault occurrence
The time resolution is 1 ms using the relay internal clock. Initiating date and time is when a fault
detector picks up. Relative time is the time when protection element operates to send tripping
signal after fault detector picks up.
3) Faulty phase
The faulty phase detected by the operating element is showed in the record report.
4) Trip mode
This shows the protection element that issues the tripping command. If no protection operates to
trip but only equipment fault detector picks up, fault report will record the title of fault detector.
2. Fault waveform record capacity and information
MON module of the relay can store 64 pieces of fault waveform oscillogram in non-volatile memory.
If a new fault occurs, when 64 fault waveform recorders have been stored, the oldest will be
5 Management
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 5-3 Date: 2013-05-17
overwritten by the latest one.
Each fault record consists of all analog and digital quantities related to protection, such as original
current and voltage, differential current, alarm elements, and binary inputs and etc.
Each time recording includes 2-cycle pre-fault waveform and most 250 cycles can be recorded.
5.3.4 Present Recording
Present recording is used to record a piece of waveform of present operation equipment which
can be trigger manually on LCD of equipment or remotely through PCS-Explorer software.
Recording content of present recording is same to that of disturbance recording.
Each time recording includes 2-cycle waveform before triggering, and up to 250 cycles can be
recorded.
5 Management
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 5-4 Date: 2013-05-17
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-a Date: 2013-05-17
6 Hardware Description
Table of Contents
6.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Plug-in Module Terminal Definition ................................................................ 6-4
6.2.1 Plug-in Module Arrangement .............................................................................................. 6-4
6.2.2 PWR Module (Power Supply) ............................................................................................. 6-5
6.2.3 MON Module (Management) .............................................................................................. 6-7
6.2.4 DSP Module ..................................................................................................................... 6-10
6.2.5 BI Module (Binary Input) ................................................................................................... 6-11
6.2.6 BO Module (Binary Output) .............................................................................................. 6-14
6.2.7 MR IO Modules (MR Input and Output) ............................................................................ 6-18
6.2.8 RLY Output Module (Relay Output ) ................................................................................. 6-41
6.2.9 AC AI Module (AC Analog Input) ....................................................................................... 6-44
6.2.10 HMI Module .................................................................................................................... 6-48
6.3 Scheme Diagram of Input and Output of MR .............................................. 6-48
6.4 Output Signals ............................................................................................... 6-52
List of Figures
Figure 6.1-1 Hardware diagram ................................................................................................ 6-1
Figure 6.1-2 Front view of PCS-974 ....................................................................................... 6-3
Figure 6.1-3 Typical rear view of PCS-974 ............................................................................... 6-4
Figure 6.2-1 Rear view of fixed module position of 4U equipment ....................................... 6-5
Figure 6.2-2 Pin definition of DC power supply module NR1301 .......................................... 6-6
Figure 6.2-3 Rear view of MON modules ................................................................................. 6-7
Figure 6.2-4 Wiring of communication interface ................................................................... 6-10
Figure 6.2-5 Rear view of DSP modules ................................................................................ 6-11
Figure 6.2-6 Pin definition of tripping output module .......................................................... 6-15
Figure 6.2-7 Pin definition of signal output module ............................................................. 6-17
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-b Date: 2013-05-17
Figure 6.2-8 Pin definition of MR input and output module 1 .............................................. 6-19
Figure 6.2-9 Pin definition of MR input and output module 2 .............................................. 6-20
Figure 6.2-10 Pin definition of MR input and output module 3 ............................................ 6-22
Figure 6.2-11 Pin definition of MR input and output module 4 ............................................ 6-23
Figure 6.2-12 Pin definition of MR input and output module 5 ............................................ 6-25
Figure 6.2-13 Pin definition of MR input and output module 6 ............................................ 6-26
Figure 6.2-14 Pin definition of MR input and output module 7 ............................................ 6-28
Figure 6.2-15 Pin definition of MR input and output module 8 ............................................ 6-29
Figure 6.2-16 Pin definition of MR input and output module 9 ............................................ 6-31
Figure 6.2-17 Pin definition of MR input and output module 10 .......................................... 6-32
Figure 6.2-18 Pin definition of MR input and output module 11 .......................................... 6-34
Figure 6.2-19 Pin definition of MR input and output module 12 .......................................... 6-35
Figure 6.2-20 Pin definition of MR input and output module 13 .......................................... 6-37
Figure 6.2-21 Pin definition of MR input and output module 14 .......................................... 6-38
Figure 6.2-22 Pin definition of MR input and output module 15 .......................................... 6-40
Figure 6.2-23 Pin definition of relay output module 1 .......................................................... 6-42
Figure 6.2-24 Pin definition of relay output module 1 .......................................................... 6-43
Figure 6.2-25 Pin definition of AC analog output module .................................................... 6-45
Figure 6.3-1 MR phase A input signals association diagram of PCS-974FG ................... 6-49
Figure 6.3-2 MR phase B input signals association diagram of PCS-974FG ................... 6-50
Figure 6.3-3 MR phase C input signals association diagram of PCS-974FG ................... 6-51
Figure 6.3-4 MR tripping output contacts association diagram of PCS-974FG ............... 6-52
List of Tables
Table 6.1-1 PCS-974 module configuration ............................................................................. 6-2
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-1 Date: 2013-05-17
6.1 Overview
Conventional CT/VT
Exte
rna
l
Bin
ary
In
pu
t
+E
Pickup
Relay
Protection
Calculation
DSP
A/D
LCD
Fault
Detector
DSP
A/D
CPU
ECVT
ECVT
Power
SupplyUaux
Keypad
LED
GPS
RJ45
ETHERNET
Ou
tpu
t Re
lay
Figure 6.1-1 Hardware diagram
The PCS-974 adopts 64-bit microchip processor CPU produced by FREESCALE as control core
for logic calculation and management function, meanwhile, adopts high-speed digital signal
processor DSP to be in charge of all the protection calculation. 24 points are sampled in every
cycle and parallel processing of sampled data can be realized in each sampling interval to ensure
ultra-high reliability and safety of protection equipment.
The working process of the device is as follows: firstly, the current and voltage is converted into
small voltage signal and sent to DSP module after being filtered and converted by AD for
protection calculation and fault detector respectively. When DSP module completes all the
protection calculation, the result will be sent to 64-bit CPU on MON module to be recorded. DSP
module 1 carries out protection logic calculation, tripping output, and MON module completes
SOE (sequence of event) record, waveform recording, printing, communication between
protection and SAS and communication between HMI and CPU. The work process of fault
detector DSP module is similar to that of protection DSP module, and the only difference is, when
fault detector DSP module decides a fault detector picks up, only positive power supply of output
relay is switched on.
The PCS-974 is comprised of intelligent modules, except that few particular modules’ position
cannot be changed in the whole device (please refer to Figure 6.2-1 for details), the others like AI
(analog input) module such as AC current, AC voltage, DC current, and etc., and IO (input and
output) module such as binary input, tripping output, signal output, and etc can be flexibly
configured according to the remained slot positions.
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-2 Date: 2013-05-17
Table 6.1-1 PCS-974 module configuration
No. Module description
1 Management module (MON module)
2 DSP module (DSP module 1
3 AC analog input module ( AC AI module )
4 Binary input module (BI module)
5 Signal output module (BO signal module )
6 Tripping output module (BO tripping module)
7 MR Input and output module (IO moudule)
8 Relay output module (RLY module)
9 Power supply module (PWR module)
10 Human machine interface module (HMI module)
11 NET-DSP module (optional)
MON module provides functions like management function, completed event record, setting
management, and etc.
DSP modules are totally the same, to carry out filtering, sampling and protection calculation
and fault detector calculation respectively.
AC AI module converts AC current and voltage to low voltage signals with current
transformers and voltage transformers respectively.
BI module provides binary input, and the binary is inputted via
24V/48V/110V/125V/220V/250V opto-coupler (configurable).
BO signal module provides all kinds of signal output contact, including annunciation signal,
remote signal, fault and disturbance signal, operation abnormal signal and etc.
BO trip module provides all tripping output contacts.
Mechanical IO module provides binary inputs of mechanical signals and all kinds of signal
output contact, including annunciation signal, remote signal, fault and disturbance signal for
mechanical protection.
Relay ouput module is applied for extention of tripping outputs by repeating tripping
command signal.
PWR module converts DC 250/220/125/110V into different DC voltage levels for various
modules of the equipment
HMI module is comprised of LCD, keypad, LED indicator and test serial ports, and it is
convenient for user to perform human-machine interaction with equipment.
NET-DSP module (optional) is applied for realization of GOOSE level interlocking, and for
connection to ECVT with supporting IEC 61850-9-1 and IEC 61850-9-2 protocols.
Following figures show front and rear views of PCS-974 respectively. Programmable LED
indicators (No.4-No.20) can be defined by users trough PCS-Explorer software.
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-3 Date: 2013-05-17
PCS-974
TRANSFORMER AUXILIARY RELAY
GR
P
ENT
ES
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
HEALTHY
ALARM
TRIP
Figure 6.1-2 Front view of PCS-974
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-4 Date: 2013-05-17
NR1401
DANGER
NR1102M NR1533NR1533NR1533NR1533 NR1301
11
1
9
3
10
8
7
6
4
5
2
12
BO_COM1
BO_ALM
OPTO+
BO_FAIL
BO_ALM
BO_COM2
OPTO-
PWR+
PWR-
GND
BO_FAIL
5V ALM
BO_ALM BO_FAIL
OK
ON
OFF
NR1161 NR1548 NR1533 NR1533NR1533NR1533NR1533NR1533
NR1533NR1533NR1533NR1544NR1544NR1502 NR1547 NR1533NR1533
Figure 6.1-3 Typical rear view of PCS-974
6.2 Plug-in Module Terminal Definition
Equipment consists of power supply module, MON module, DSP module, Analog input module,
opto-coupler input module, tripping output module, signal output module, input and output signal
for mechanical relay. The definition and application of each module and its terminal is introduced
as follows:
6.2.1 Plug-in Module Arrangement
The module arrangement of PCS-974FG from rear view is shown in the following view
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-5 Date: 2013-05-17
MO
N m
od
ule
DS
P m
od
ule
AC
AI m
od
ule
MR
IO
mo
du
le 2
MR
IO
mo
du
le 3
MR
IO
mo
du
le 4
MR
IO
mo
du
le 5
Slot No.01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 P1
NR1301NR1533NR1102 NR1161 NR1533 NR1533NR1401 NR1533
MR
IO
mo
du
le 6
MR
IO
mo
du
le 7
11 12
NR1533NR1533
MR
IO
mo
du
le 8
13
NR1533
MR
IO
mo
du
le 9
14
NR1533
PW
R m
od
ule
BI m
od
ule
BO
mo
du
le 2
RL
Y o
utp
ut m
od
ule
1
Slot No.16 17 18 19 20 21 22
NR1502 NR1157 NR1544
RL
Y o
utp
ut m
od
ule
223 24
NR1544
MR
IO
mo
du
le 1
1
25
NR1533
MR
IO
mo
du
le 1
2
26
NR1533
MR
IO
mo
du
le 1
3
27
NR1533
MR
IO
mo
du
le 1
4
28
NR1533
29 31 32
NR1548 NR1533
BO
mo
du
le 1
MR
IO
mo
du
le 1
MR
IO
mo
du
le 1
0
15
NR1533
MR
IO
mo
du
le 1
5
NR1533
33
Figure 6.2-1 Rear view of fixed module position of 4U equipment
6.2.2 PWR Module (Power Supply)
The power supply module (NR1301) is a DC/DC or AC/DC converter with electrical insulation
between input and output. The power supply module has an input voltage range as described in
Chapter “Technical Data”. The standardized output voltages are +3.3V, +5V, ±12V and +24V DC.
The tolerances of the output voltages are continuously monitored.
The +3.3V DC output provides power supply for the microchip processors, and the +5V DC output
provides power supply for all the electrical elements that need +5V DC power supply in this device.
The ±12V DC output provides power supply for A/D conversion circuits in this device, and the
+24V DC output provides power supply for the static relays of this device.
The use of an external miniature circuit breaker is recommended. The miniature circuit breaker
must be in the on position when the device is in operation and in the off position when the device is
in cold reserve.
A 12-pin connector is fixed on the front of the power supply module at slot 01. The pin definition of
the connector is described as below.
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-6 Date: 2013-05-17
NR1301
11
1
9
3
10
8
7
6
4
5
2
12
BO_COM1
OPTO+
PWR+
PWR-
GND
5V OK ALM
BO_ALM
BO_FAIL
BO_COM2
BO_FAIL
OPTO-
BO_ALM
BO_ALM
BO_FAIL
BO_FAIL
BO_ALM0102
0103
0101
0105
0106
0104BO_FAIL
BO_ALM
Figure 6.2-2 Pin definition of DC power supply module NR1301
Pin No. Symbol Description
0101 BO_COM1 Common terminal 1
0102 BO_FAIL Device failure output 1 (01-02, NC)
0103 BO_ALM Device abnormality alarm output 1 (01-03, NO)
0104 BO_COM2 Common terminal 2
0105 BO_FAIL Device failure output 2 (0104-0105, NC)
0106 BO_ALM Device abnormality alarm output 2 (0104-0106, NO)
0107 OPTO+ Positive pole of power supply for Low-voltage BI module (24V)
0108 OPTO- Negative pole of power supply for Low-voltage BI module (24V)
0109 Not used
0110 PWR+ Positive pole of power supply for the device (250/220V/125/110V)
0111 PWR- Negative pole of power supply for the device (250/220V/125/110V)
0112 GND Grounded connection of the device
NOTE! The rated voltage of DC power supply module is self-adaptive to 220Vdc and
110Vdc, but the power supply in other DC voltage level or power supply of AC voltage
need to be specially ordered, and check if the rated voltage of power supply module is
the same as the voltage of external control power supply before equipment being put into
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-7 Date: 2013-05-17
service.
NOTE! The DC power supply module provides pin 0112 and earth connector for
grounding of equipment. The pin 0112 shall be connected to earth connector and the
connected to the earth copper bar of panel via dedicated grounding wire.
NOTE! Effective grounding is the most important measure for equipment to prevent
EMI, so effective grounding must be ensured before the device is put into operation.
6.2.3 MON Module (Management)
The terminals of MON module (NR1102) and its wiring method are shown in the following figure.
The MON module consists of high-performance built-in processor, FLASH, SRAM, SDRAM,
Ethernet controller and other peripherals. Its functions include management of the complete
device, human machine interface, communication and waveform recording etc.
The MON module uses the internal bus to receive the data from other modules of the device. It
communicates with the LCD module by RS-485 bus. This module is provided with 100BaseT
Ethernet interfaces, RS-485 communication interfaces, PPS/IRIG-B differential time
synchronization interface and RS-232 printing interface.
NR1102A
ETHERNET
NR1102C
ETHERNET
NR1102B
ETHERNET
NR1102M
ETHERNET
NR1102J
ETHERNET
TX
RX
TX
RX
NR1102I
ETHERNET
TX
RX
TX
RX
NR1101E
ETHERNET
Figure 6.2-3 Rear view of MON modules
Module
ID Memory Interface Pin No. Usage Physical Layer
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-8 Date: 2013-05-17
Module
ID Memory Interface Pin No. Usage Physical Layer
NR1102A 64M DDR
2 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA
Twisted pair wire
RS-485
0201 SYN+
To clock
synchronization
0202 SYN-
0203 SGND
0204
RS-232
0205 RTS
To printer 0206 TXD
0207 SGND
NR1102B 64M DDR
4 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA
Twisted pair wire
RS-485
0201 SYN+
To clock
synchronization
0202 SYN-
0203 SGND
0204
RS-232
0205 RTS
To printer 0206 TXD
0207 SGND
NR1102C 128M DDR
2 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA
Twisted pair wire
RS-485
0201 SYN+
To clock
synchronization
0202 SYN-
0203 SGND
0204
RS-232
0205 RTS
To printer 0206 TXD
0207 SGND
NR1102M 256M DDR
4 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA
Twisted pair wire
RS-485
0201 SYN+
To clock
synchronization
0202 SYN-
0203 SGND
0204
RS-232
0205 RTS
To printer 0206 TXD
0207 SGND
NR1102J 256M DDR
2 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA Twisted pair wire
2 FO Ethernet To SCADA Optical fibre ST
RS-485
0201 SYN+
To clock
synchronization
Twisted pair wire
0202 SYN-
0203 SGND
0204
RS-232
0205 RTS
To printer 0206 TXD
0207 SGND
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-9 Date: 2013-05-17
Module
ID Memory Interface Pin No. Usage Physical Layer
NR1102I 128M DDR
2 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA Twisted pair wire
2 FO Ethernet To SCADA Optical fibre ST
RS-485
0201 SYN+
To clock
synchronization
Twisted pair wire
0202 SYN-
0203 SGND
0204
RS-232
0205 RTS
To printer 0206 TXD
0207 SGND
NR1101E 128M DDR
2 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA
Twisted pair wire
RS-485
0201 A
To SCADA 0202 B
0203 SGND
0204
RS-485
0205 A
To SCADA 0206 B
0207 SGND
0208
RS-485
0209 SYN+
To clock
synchronization
0210 SYN-
0211 SGND
0212
RS-232
0213 RTS
To printer 0214 TXD
0215 SGND
0216
The correct method of connection is shown in Figure 6.2-4. Generally, the shielded cables with two
pairs of twisted pairs inside shall be applied. One pair of the twisted pairs are respectively used to
connect the “+” and “–” terminals of differential signal; the other pair of twisted pairs are used to
connect the signal ground of the interface, i.e. connect the signal groundings of all the devices
connected with the bus to the twisted pair. The module reserves a free terminal for all the
communication ports; the blank terminal does not need to be connected.
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-10 Date: 2013-05-17
01
02
03
05
06
07SGND
RTS
TXD
SYN+
SYN-
SGND
04
01
02
03
A
B
SGND
04
Twisted pair wire
Twisted pair wire
Twisted pair wire
To
the
scre
en
of o
the
r co
axia
l
ca
ble
with
sin
gle
po
int e
arth
ing
CO
MC
LO
CK
SY
NP
RIN
T
Figure 6.2-4 Wiring of communication interface
6.2.4 DSP Module
The module consists of high-performance digital signal processor, optical-fibre interface, 16-digit
high-accuracy ADC that can perform synchronous sampling and other peripherals. The functions
of this module include analog data acquisition, sample data exchanging with the opposite side,
calculation of protection logic and tripping output etc.
When the module is connected to conventional CT/VT, it can perform the synchronous data
acquisition through the AC input board; when the module is connected to ECVT, it can receive the
real-time synchronous sample data from merging unit through the multi-mode optical-fibre
interface.
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-11 Date: 2013-05-17
NR1161A NR1161B NR1161C
TX
RX
RX
Figure 6.2-5 Rear view of DSP modules
Module ID Description
NR1161A 8 analog sampling channels, applied for conventional CT/VT.
NR1161B 12 analog sampling channels, applied for conventional CT/VT.
NR1161C 12 analog sampling channels and 3 ST multi-mode optic fiber ports (1 prot for sending
and 2 ports for receiving, supporting IEC 60044-8), applied for ECVT.
6.2.5 BI Module (Binary Input)
There are two kinds of BI modules available, NR1502Aand NR1502D. The input voltage can be
selected to be 24V/48V (NR1502A) or 110V/220V/125V/250V (NR1502D). This module provides
the monitoring circuit of opto-coupler power supply.
All binary inputs share one common negative power input, and can be configurable. The pin
definition of the connector is described as below.
BI module is with a 30-pin connector for 25 binary inputs shown in the following figure.
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-12 Date: 2013-05-17
1601
1603
1605
1607
1609
1611
1613
1615
1617
1619
1621
1623
1625
1627
1629
1602
1604
1606
1608
1610
1612
1614
1616
1618
1620
1622
1624
1626
1628
1630
BI_01
BI_03
BI_02
BI_04
NR1502
Opto+
BI_12
BI_05BI_06
BI_08 BI_07
BI_09BI_10
Opto-
BI_11
BI_14 BI_13
BI_15BI_16
BI_17BI_18
BI_19BI_20
BI_21BI_22
BI_23BI_24
BI_25
NR1502
Figure 6.2-4 Pin definition of BI module (NR1503)
The pin definition of NR 1502 is shown as follows respectively.
Pin No. Original
Symbol
Defined
Symbol Description
1601 BI_01 BI_TimeSyn Binary input of time synchronization pulse.
1602 BI_02 BI_Print Binary input of triggering printing.
1603 BI_03 BI_Maintenance Binary input of indicating the protection device is under maintenance
state.
1604 BI_04 BI_RstTarg Binary input of resetting signal of protective equipment.
1605 BI_05 BI_En62PD Binary input of enabling pole disagreement protection.
1606 BI_06 BI_En50BF Binary input of enabling breaker failure initiation.
1607 BI_07 BI_EnDlyMR Binary input of enabling MR protection with time delay.
1608 BI_08 BI_EnRmtCtrl Binary input of enabling remote control function.
1609 BI_09 Configurable binary input 09.
1610 BI_10 Configurable binary input 10.
1611 BI_11 Configurable binary input 11.
1612 BI_12 Configurable binary input 12.
1613 Opto+ Positive pole of binary input.
1614 Not used.
1615 Opto- Negative pole of binary input.
1616 Not used
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-13 Date: 2013-05-17
Pin No. Original
Symbol
Defined
Symbol Description
1617 BI_13 Configurable binary input 13.
1618 BI_14 Configurable binary input 14.
1619 BI_15 Configurable binary input 15.
1620 BI_16 Configurable binary input 16.
1621 BI_17 Configurable binary input 17.
1622 BI_18 Configurable binary input 18.
1623 BI_19 Configurable binary input 19.
1624 BI_20 Configurable binary input 20.
1625 BI_21 Configurable binary input 21.
1626 BI_22 BI_ExTCtrlPD2 Binary input of tripping signal for controlling delay 2 of pole
disagreement.
1627 BI_23 BI_ExTCtrlBFI Binary input of tripping signal for controlling breaker failure initiation.
1628 BI_24 BI_52a Binary input of auxiliary NO contact of circuit breaker.
1629 BI_25 BI_PD Binary input of pole disagreement of circuit breaker.
1630 Not used.
1. Binary input: [BI_TimeSyn]
It is used to receive clock synchronism signal from GPS or other device, the binary input
[BI_Pulse_GPS] will change from “0” to “1” once GPS is received. When setting [Opt_TimeSyn] is
select as “PPM(DIN) “ , the device receives pulse per minute (PMS) via the binary input
[BI_Pulse_GPS].,.
2. Binary input: [BI_Print]
It is used to manually trigger printing latest report when the equipment is configured as manual
printing mode by logic setting [En_AutoPrint]=0. The printer button is located on the panel usually.
If the equipment is configured as automatic printing mode ([En_AutoPrint]=1), report will be printed
automatically as soon as it is formed.
3. Binary input: [BI_Maintenance]
It is used to block communication export when the BI is energized. During equipment maintenance
or testing, the BI is then energized not to send reports via communication port, local display and
printing still work as usual. The BI should be de-energized when the equipment is restored back to
normal.
4. Binary input: [BI_RstTarg]
It is used to reset latching signal relay and LCD displaying. The reset is done by pressing a button
on the panel.
NOTE! The rated voltage of binary input is optional: 24V, 48V, 110V, 125V, 220V or 250V,
which must be specified when placed order. It is necessary to check whether the rated
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-14 Date: 2013-05-17
voltage of BI module complies with site DC supply rating before put the relay in service.
The application of the binary input [BI_Maintenance] for digital substation communication adopting
IEC61850 protocol is given as follows.
1) Processing mechanism for MMS (Manufacturing Message Specification) message
a) The protection device should send the state of this binary input to client.
b) When this binary input is energized, the bit “Test” of quality (Q) in the message sent
change “1”.
c) When this binary input is energized, the client cannot control the isolator link and circuit
breaker, modify settings and switch setting group remotely.
d) According to the value of the bit “Test” of quality (Q) in the message sent, the client
discriminate whether this message is maintenance message, and then deal with it
correspondingly. If the message is the maintenance message, the content of the message
will not be displayed on real-time message window, audio alarm not issued, but the picture
is refreshed so as to ensure that the state of the picture is in step with the actual state. The
maintenance message will be stored, and can be inquired, in independent window.
2) Processing mechanism for GOOSE message
a) When this binary input is energized, the bit “Test” in the GOOSE message sent by the
protection device changes “1”.
b) For the receiving end of GOOSE message, it will compare the value of the bit “Test” in the
GOOSE message received by it with the state of its own binary input (i..e
[BI_Maintenance]), the message will be thought as invalid unless they are conformable.
3) Processing mechanism for SV (Sampling Value) message
a) When this binary input of merging unit is energized, the bit “Test” of quality (Q) of sampling
data in the SV message sent change “1”.
b) For the receiving end of SV message, if the value of bit “Test” of quality (Q) of sampling
data in the SV message received by it is “1”, the relevant protection functions will be
disabled, but under maintenance state, the protection device should calculate and display
the magnitude of sampling data.
c) For duplicated protection function configurations, all merging units of control module
configured to receive sampling should be also duplicated. Both dual protection devices
and dual merging units should be fully independent each other, and one of them is in
maintenance state will not affect the normal operation of the other.
6.2.6 BO Module (Binary Output)
6.2.6.1 Tripping Output Module (NR1547A)
NR1547A is a standard binary output module, which can provide 15 tripping output contacts and
output contacts can be controlled separately by positive power supply of fault detector. The
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-15 Date: 2013-05-17
contacts provide by NR1547A are all normally open (NO) contacts.
A 30-pin connector is fixed on the front of this module. The pin definition of the connector is
described as below.
1701
1702
1703
1704
1705
1706
1707
1708
1709
1710
1711
1712
1713
1714
BO_Trp_1
NR1547
1715
1716
1717
1718
1719
1720
1721
1722
BO_Trp_2
BO_Trp_3
BO_Trp_4
BO_Trp_5
BO_Trp_6
BO_Trp_7
BO_Trp_8
BO_Trp_9
BO_Trp_10
BO_Trp_11
BO_Trp_11702
1701
BO_Trp_21704
1703
BO_Trp_31706
1705
BO_Trp_41708
1707
BO_Trp_51710
1709
BO_Trp_61712
1711
BO_Trp_71714
1713
BO_Trp_81716
1715
BO_Trp_91718
1717
BO_Trp_101720
1719
BO_Trp_111722
1721
NR1547
1723
1724
1725
1726
1727
1728
1729
1730
BO_Trp_12
BO_Trp_13
BO_Trp_14
BO_Trp_15
BO_Trp_121724
1723
BO_Trp_131726
1725
BO_Trp_141728
1727
BO_Trp_151730
1729
Figure 6.2-6 Pin definition of tripping output module
The pin definition of the tripping output module at slot 17 is shown as follows.
Pin No. Original
Symbol
New-defined
Symbol Description
1701 BO_Trp_1 BO_Trp_62PDt1_1
The NO contact 1 of tripping output of pole disagreement
protection delay 1. 1702
1703 BO_Trp_2 BO_Trp_62PDt1_2
The NO contact 2 of tripping output of pole disagreement
protection delay 1. 1704
1705 BO_Trp_3 BO_Trp_62PDt2_1
The NO contact 1 of tripping output of pole disagreement
protection delay 2. 1706
1707 BO_Trp_4 BO_Trp_62PDt2_2
The NO contact 2 of tripping output of pole disagreement
protection delay 2. 1708
1709 BO_Trp_5 BO_Trp_50BFt1_1
The NO contact 1 of tripping output of breaker failure initiation
delay 1. 1710
1711 BO_Trp_6 BO_Trp_50BFt1_2 The NO contact 2 of tripping output of breaker failure initiation
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-16 Date: 2013-05-17
Pin No. Original
Symbol
New-defined
Symbol Description
1712 delay 1.
1713 BO_Trp_7 BO_Trp_50BFt2_1
The NO contact 1 of tripping output of breaker failure initiation
delay 2. 1714
1715 BO_Trp_8 BO_Trp_50BFt2_2
The NO contact 2 of tripping output of breaker failure initiation
delay 2. 1716
1717 BO_Trp_9 BO_Trp_DlyMR1
The NO contact of tripping output of delayed mechanical
protection of MR1. 1718
1719 BO_Trp_10 BO_Trp_DlyMR2
The NO contact of tripping output of delayed mechanical
protection of MR2. 1720
1721 BO_Trp_11 BO_Trp_DlyMR3
The NO contact of tripping output of delayed mechanical
protection of MR3. 1722
1723 BO_Trp_12 BO_Trp_DlyMR4
The NO contact of tripping output of delayed mechanical
protection of MR4. 1724
1725 BO_Trp_13 Not used
1726
1727 BO_Trp_14 Not used
1728
1729 BO_Trp_15 Not used
1730
6.2.6.2 Signal Output Module (NR1548B)
The NR1548B module is a standard binary output module for signal, which can provide 15 signal
output contacts without control by fault detector. Among those contacts, contacts [BO_Signal_n]
(n=1,2,…,7, 10, 13, 14, 15) are normally open (NO) contacts and [BO_Signal_11] and
[BO_Siganl_12] are normally closed (NC) contacts. [BO_Signal_x] (x=1, 2, …12) are reserved,
and the last three contact [BO_Prot_x] (x=1, 2, 3) are signal contacts indicating protection
operation. Besides, [BO_Prot_3] is a magnetic latched NO contact defined as protection tripping
signal fixedly.
A 30-pin connector is fixed on the front of this module. The pin definition of the connector is
described as below.
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-17 Date: 2013-05-17
0501
0502
0503
0504
0505
0506
0507
0508
0509
0510
0511
0512
0513
0514
BO_Signal_1
NR1548
0515
0516
0517
0518
0519
0520
0521
0522
BO_Signal_2
BO_Signal_3
BO_Signal_4
BO_Signal_5
BO_Signal_6
BO_Signal_7
BO_Signal_8
BO_Signal_9
BO_Signal_10
BO_Signal_11
BO_Signal_10502
0501
BO_Signal_20504
0503
BO_Signal_30506
0505
BO_Signal_40508
0507
BO_Signal_50510
0509
BO_Signal_60512
0511
BO_Signal_70514
0513
BO_Signal_80516
0515
BO_Signal_90518
0517
BO_Signal_100520
0519
BO_Signal_110522
0521
NR1548
0523
0524
0525
0526
0527
0528
0529
0530
BO_Signal_12
BO_Prot_1
BO_Prot_2
BO_Signal_120524
0523
BO_Prot_10526
0525
BO_Prot_20528
0527
BO_Prot_30530
0529BO_Prot_3
Figure 6.2-7 Pin definition of signal output module
NOTE! If more magnetic latched contacts or normally closed (NC) contacts are required,
please specify when placing order.
The pin definition of the signal output module at slot 05 is shown as follows.
Pin No. Original
Symbol
New-defined
Symbol Description
0501 BO_Signal_1 BO_50BF_1 The NO contact 1 of signal output of breaker failure initiation.
0502
0503 BO_ Signal_2 BO_50BF_2 The NO contact 2 of signal output of breaker failure initiation.
0504
0505 BO_ Signal_3 Not used
0506
0507 BO_ Signal_4 Not used
0508
0509 BO_ Signal_5 Not used
0510
0511 BO_ Signal_6 Not used
0512
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-18 Date: 2013-05-17
Pin No. Original
Symbol
New-defined
Symbol Description
0513 BO_ Signal_7 Not used
0514
0515 BO_ Signal_8 Not used
0516
0517 BO_ Signal_9 BO_50BF_3 The NO contact 3 of signal output of breaker failure initiation.
0518
0519 BO_ Signal_10 BO_RstTarg The NO contact of resetting signals.
0520
0521 BO_ Signal_11 Not used
0522
0523 BO_ Signal_12 Not used
0524
0525 BO_ Signal_13 BO_Prot_1 The NO contact 1 for indicating protection operation.
0526
0527 BO_ Signal_14 BO_Prot_2 The NO contact 2 for indicating protection operation.
0528
0529 BO_ Signal_15 BO_Prot_3
The NO contact 3 (magnetic latched) for indicating protection
operation. 0530
6.2.7 MR IO Modules (MR Input and Output)
Fifteen MR input and output modules (IO module) for mechanical protection are equipped at slot
06~15 and slot 25-29 respectively.
NR1533A (220/250Vdc) and NR1533B(110/125Vdc) are input and output modules (IO module) for
mechanical protection, and this module is used to output various signals, issue trip commands and
accept reset command.
6.2.7.1 IO Module 1 at Slot 06 (NR1533)
The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of IO module 1 at slot 06 position.
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-19 Date: 2013-05-17
0607
0605
0603
0601 Reset Signal ResetInput
BI_PhA_MR01Binary Input
Signals of
Mechanical
protection
Hig
h V
olta
ge
BI_PhA_MR02
BI_PhA_MR03
0606
0604
0602 BO_PhA_MR01_1
BO_PhA_MR02_1
BO_PhA_MR03_1
NR1533 (MR IO Module)
0625Module Power Input
0629
Pwr+
Pwr -
BO_PhA_MR04_10608
0609 BI_PhA_MR04
Common10610
0615
0613 BO_PhA_MR02_2
BO_PhA_MR03_2
BO_PhA_MR04_20617
Common20619
0611 BO_PhA_MR01_2
0616
0614 BO_PhA_MR02_3
BO_PhA_MR03_3
BO_PhA_MR04_30618
Common30620
0612 BO_PhA_MR01_3
NR1533
0626
0624 BO_PhA_MR02_4
BO_PhA_MR03_4
BO_PhA_MR04_40628
Common40630
0622 BO_PhA_MR01_4
Figure 6.2-8 Pin definition of MR input and output module 1
Pin No. Symbol Description
0601 ResetInput Reset input, when a reset signal arrives, the corresponding magnetic latched
contacts of mechanical signals are reset.
Mechanical signal inputs
0603 BI_PhA_MR01 Phase A input signal of MR1 mechanical relay.
0605 BI_PhA_MR02 Phase A input signal of MR2 mechanical relay.
0607 BI_PhA_MR03 Phase A input signal of MR3 mechanical relay.
0609 BI_PhA_MR04 Phase A input signal of MR4 mechanical relay.
1st group output contacts (magnetic latched contact) as annunciation signal
0610, 0602 BO_PhA_MR01_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR01] is energized.
0610, 0604 BO_PhA_MR02_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR02] is energized.
0610, 0606 BO_PhA_MR03_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR03] is energized.
0610, 0608 BO_PhA_MR04_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR04] is energized.
2nd group output contacts as MR repeating signal
0619, 0611 BO_PhA_MR01_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR01] is energized.
0619, 0613 BO_PhA_MR02_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR02] is energized.
0619, 0615 BO_PhA_MR03_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR03] is energized.
0619, 0617 BO_PhA_MR04_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR04] is energized.
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-20 Date: 2013-05-17
Pin No. Symbol Description
3rd group output contacts as remote signal
0620, 0612 BO_PhA_MR01_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR01] is energized.
0620, 0614 BO_PhA_MR02_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR02] is energized.
0620, 0616 BO_PhA_MR03_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR03] is energized.
0620, 0618 BO_PhA _MR04_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR04] is energized.
4th group output contacts as disturbance&fault recording (DFR) signal
0630, 0622 BO_PhA_MR01_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR01] is energized.
0630, 0624 BO_PhA_MR02_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR02] is energized.
0630, 0626 BO_PhA_MR03_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR03] is energized.
0630, 0628 BO_PhA_MR04_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR04] is energized.
Power supply input of module
0625 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply
0629 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply
6.2.7.2 IO Module 2 at Slot 07 (NR1533)
The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of IO module 2 at slot 07 position.
0707
0705
0703
0701 Reset Signal ResetInput
BI_PhA_MR05Binary Input
Signals of
Mechanical
protection
Hig
h V
olta
ge
BI_PhA_MR06
BI_PhA_MR07
0706
0704
0702 BO_PhA_MR05_1
BO_PhA_MR06_1
BO_PhA_MR07_1
NR1533 (MR IO Module)
0725Module Power Input
0729
Pwr+
Pwr -
BO_PhA_MR08_10708
0709 BI_PhA_MR08
Common10710
0715
0713 BO_PhA_MR06_2
BO_PhA_MR07_2
BO_PhA_MR08_20717
Common20719
0711 BO_PhA_MR05_2
0716
0714 BO_PhA_MR06_3
BO_PhA_MR07_3
BO_PhA_MR08_30718
Common30720
0712 BO_PhA_MR05_3
NR1533
0726
0724 BO_PhA_MR06_4
BO_PhA_MR07_4
BO_PhA_MR08_40728
Common40730
0722 BO_PhA_MR05_4
Figure 6.2-9 Pin definition of MR input and output module 2
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-21 Date: 2013-05-17
Pin No. Symbol Description
0701 ResetInput Reset input, when a reset signal arrives, the corresponding magnetic latched
contacts of mechanical signals are reset.
Mechanical signal inputs
0703 BI_PhA_MR05 Phase A input signal of MR5 mechanical relay.
0705 BI_PhA_MR06 Phase A input signal of MR6 mechanical relay.
0707 BI_PhA_MR07 Phase A input signal of MR7 mechanical relay.
0709 BI_PhA_MR08 Phase A input signal of MR8 mechanical relay.
1st group output contacts (magnetic latched contact) as annunciation signal
0710, 0702 BO_PhA_MR05_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR05] is energized.
0710, 0704 BO_PhA_MR06_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR06] is energized.
0710, 0706 BO_PhA_MR07_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR07] is energized.
0710, 0708 BO_PhA_MR08_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR08] is energized.
2nd group output contacts as MR repeating signal
0719, 0711 BO_PhA_MR05_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR05] is energized.
0719, 0713 BO_PhA_MR06_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR06] is energized.
0719, 0715 BO_PhA_MR07_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR07] is energized.
0719, 0717 BO_PhA_MR08_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR08] is energized.
3rd group output contacts as remote signal
0720, 0712 BO_PhA_MR05_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR05] is energized.
0720, 0714 BO_PhA_MR06_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR06] is energized.
0720, 0716 BO_PhA_MR07_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR07] is energized.
0720, 0718 BO_PhA_MR08_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR08] is energized.
4th group output contacts as disturbance&fault recording (DFR) signal
0730, 0722 BO_PhA_MR05_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR05] is energized.
0730, 0724 BO_PhA_MR06_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR06] is energized.
0730, 0726 BO_PhA_MR07_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR07] is energized.
0730, 0728 BO_PhA_MR08_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR08] is energized.
Power supply input of module
0725 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply
0729 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply
6.2.7.3 IO Module 3 at Slot 08 (NR1533)
The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of IO module 3 at slot 08 position.
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-22 Date: 2013-05-17
0807
0805
0803
0801 Reset Signal ResetInput
BI_PhA_MR09Binary Input
Signals of
Mechanical
protection
Hig
h V
olta
ge
MBI_PhA_MR10
MBI_PhA_MR11
0806
0804
0802 BO_PhA_MR09_1
BO_PhA_MR10_1
BO_PhA_MR11_1
NR1533 (MR IO Module)
0825Module Power Input
0829
Pwr+
Pwr -
BO_PhA_MR12_10808
0809 MBI_PhA_MR12
Common10810
0815
0813 BO_PhA_MR10_2
BO_PhA_MR11_2
BO_PhA_MR12_20817
Common20819
0811 BO_PhA_MR09_2
0816
0814 BO_PhA_MR10_3
BO_PhA_MR11_3
BO_PhA_MR12_30818
Common30820
0812 BO_PhA_MR09_3
NR1533
0826
0824 BO_PhA_MR10_4
BO_PhA_MR11_4
BO_PhA_MR12_40828
Common40830
0822 BO_PhA_MR09_4
Figure 6.2-10 Pin definition of MR input and output module 3
Pin No. Symbol Description
0801 ResetInput Reset input, when a reset signal arrives, the corresponding magnetic latched
contacts of mechanical signals are reset.
Mechanical signal inputs
0803 BI_PhA_MR09 Phase A input signal of MR9 mechanical relay.
0805 BI_PhA_MR10 Phase A input signal of MR10 mechanical relay.
0807 BI_PhA_MR11 Phase A input signal of MR11 mechanical relay.
0809 BI_PhA_MR12 Phase A input signal of MR12 mechanical relay.
1st group output contacts (magnetic latched contact) as annunciation signal
0810, 0802 BO_PhA_MR09_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR09] is energized.
0810, 0804 BO_PhA_MR10_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR10] is energized.
0810, 0806 BO_PhA_MR11_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR11] is energized.
0810, 0808 BO_PhA_MR12_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR12] is energized.
2nd group output contacts as MR repeating signal
0819, 0811 BO_PhA_MR09_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR09] is energized.
0819, 0813 BO_PhA_MR10_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR10] is energized.
0819, 0815 BO_PhA_MR11_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR11] is energized.
0819, 0817 BO_PhA_MR12_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR12] is energized.
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-23 Date: 2013-05-17
Pin No. Symbol Description
3rd group output contacts as remote signal
0820, 0812 BO_PhA_MR09_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR09] is energized.
0820, 0814 BO_PhA_MR10_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR10] is energized.
0820, 0816 BO_PhA_MR11_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR11] is energized.
0820, 0818 BO_PhA_MR12_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR12] is energized.
4th group output contacts as disturbance&fault recording (DFR) signal
0830, 0822 BO_PhA_MR09_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR09] is energized.
0830, 0824 BO_PhA_MR10_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR10] is energized.
0830, 0826 BO_PhA_MR11_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR11] is energized.
0830, 0828 BO_PhA_MR12_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR12] is energized.
Power supply input of module
0825 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply
0829 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply
6.2.7.4 IO Module 4 at Slot 09 (NR1533)
The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of IO module 4 at slot 09 position.
0907
0905
0903
0901 Reset Signal ResetInput
BI_PhA_MR13Binary Input
Signals of
Mechanical
protection
Hig
h V
olta
ge
BI_PhA_MR14
BI_PhA_MR15
0906
0904
0902 BO_PhA_MR13_1
BO_PhA_MR14_1
BO_PhA_MR15_1
NR1533 (MR IO Module)
0925Module Power Input
0929
Pwr+
Pwr -
BO_PhA_MR16_10908
0909 BI_PhA_MR16
Common10910
0915
0913 BO_PhA_MR14_2
BO_PhA_MR15_2
BO_PhA_MR16_20917
Common20919
0911 BO_PhA_MR13_2
0916
0914 BO_PhA_MR14_3
BO_PhA_MR15_3
BO_PhA_MR16_30918
Common30920
0912 BO_PhA_MR13_3
NR1533
0926
0924 BO_PhA_MR14_4
BO_PhA_MR15_4
BO_PhA_MR16_40928
Common40930
0922 BO_PhA_MR13_4
Figure 6.2-11 Pin definition of MR input and output module 4
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-24 Date: 2013-05-17
Pin No. Symbol Description
0901 ResetInput Reset input, when a reset signal arrives, the corresponding magnetic latched
contacts of mechanical signals are reset.
Mechanical signal inputs
0903 BI_PhA_MR13 Phase A input signal of MR13 mechanical relay.
0905 BI_PhA_MR14 Phase A input signal of MR14 mechanical relay.
0907 BI_PhA_MR15 Phase A input signal of MR15 mechanical relay.
0909 BI_PhA_MR16 Phase A input signal of MR16 mechanical relay.
1st group output contacts (magnetic latched contact) as annunciation signal
0910, 0902 BO_PhA_MR13_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR13] is energized.
0910, 0904 BO_PhA_MR14_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR14] is energized.
0910, 0906 BO_PhA_MR15_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR15] is energized.
0910, 0908 BO_PhA_MR16_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR16] is energized.
2nd group output contacts as MR repeating signal
0919, 0911 BO_PhA_MR13_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR13] is energized.
0919, 0913 BO_PhA_MR14_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR14] is energized.
0919, 0915 BO_PhA_MR15_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR15] is energized.
0919, 0917 BO_PhA_MR16_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR16] is energized.
3rd group output contacts as remote signal
0920, 0912 BO_PhA _MR13_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR13] is energized.
0920, 0914 BO_PhA _MR14_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR14] is energized.
0920, 0916 BO_PhA _MR15_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR15] is energized.
0920, 0918 BO_PhA _MR16_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR16] is energized.
4th group output contacts as disturbance&fault recording (DFR) signal
0930, 0922 BO_PhA_MR13_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR13] is energized.
0930, 0924 BO_PhA_MR14_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR14] is energized.
0930, 0926 BO_PhA_MR15_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR15] is energized.
0930, 0928 BO_PhA_MR16_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR16] is energized.
Power supply input of module
0925 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply
0929 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply
6.2.7.5 IO Module 5 at Slot 10 (NR1533)
The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of IO module 5 at slot 10 position.
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-25 Date: 2013-05-17
1007
1005
1003
1001 Reset Signal ResetInput
BI_PhA_MR17Binary Input
Signals of
Mechanical
protection
Hig
h V
olta
ge
BI_PhA_MR18
BI_PhA_MR19
1006
1004
1002 BO_PhA_MR17_1
BO_PhA_MR18_1
BO_PhA_MR19_1
NR1533 (MR IO Module)
1025Module Power Input
1029
Pwr+
Pwr -
BO_PhA_MR20_11008
1009 BI_PhA_MR20
Common11010
1015
1013 BO_PhA_MR18_2
BO_PhA_MR19_2
BO_PhA_MR20_21017
Common21019
1011 BO_PhA_MR17_2
1016
1014 BO_PhA_MR18_3
BO_PhA_MR19_3
BO_PhA_MR20_31018
Common31020
1012 BO_PhA_MR17_3
NR1533
1026
1024 BO_PhA_MR18_4
BO_PhA_MR19_4
BO_PhA_MR20_41028
Common41030
1022 BO_PhA_MR17_4
Figure 6.2-12 Pin definition of MR input and output module 5
Pin No. Symbol Description
1001 ResetInput Reset input, when a reset signal arrives, the corresponding magnetic latched
contacts of mechanical signals are reset.
Mechanical signal inputs
1003 BI_PhA_MR17 Phase A input signal of MR17 mechanical relay.
1005 BI_PhA_MR18 Phase A input signal of MR18 mechanical relay.
1007 BI_PhA_MR19 Phase A input signal of MR19 mechanical relay.
1009 BI_PhA_MR20 Phase A input signal of MR20 mechanical relay.
1st group output contacts (magnetic latched contact) as annunciation signal
1010, 1002 BO_PhA_MR17_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR17] is energized.
1010, 1004 BO_PhA_MR18_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR18] is energized.
1010, 1006 BO_PhA_MR19_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR19] is energized.
1010, 1008 BO_PhA_MR20_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR20] is energized.
2nd group output contacts as MR repeating signal
1019, 1011 BO_PhA_MR17_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR17] is energized.
1019, 1013 BO_PhA_MR18_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR18] is energized.
1019, 1015 BO_PhA_MR19_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR19] is energized.
1019, 1017 BO_PhA_MR20_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR20] is energized.
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-26 Date: 2013-05-17
Pin No. Symbol Description
3rd group output contacts as remote signal
1020, 1012 BO_PhA_MR17_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR17] is energized.
1020, 1014 BO_PhA_MR18_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR18] is energized.
1020, 1016 BO_PhA_MR19_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR19] is energized.
1020, 1018 BO_PhA_MR20_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR20] is energized.
4th group output contacts as disturbance&fault recording (DFR) signal
1030, 1022 BO_PhA_MR17_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR17] is energized.
1030, 1024 BO_PhA_MR18_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR18] is energized.
1030, 1026 BO_PhA_MR19_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR19] is energized.
1030, 1028 BO_PhA_MR20_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR20] is energized.
Power supply input of module
1025 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply
1029 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply
6.2.7.6 IO Module 6 at Slot 11 (NR1533)
The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of IO module 6 at slot 11 position.
1107
1105
1103
1101 Reset Signal ResetInput
BI_PhB_MR01Binary Input
Signals of
Mechanical
protection
Hig
h V
olta
ge
BI_PhB_MR02
BI_PhB_MR03
1106
1104
1102 BO_PhB_MR01_1
BO_PhB_MR02_1
BO_PhB_MR03_1
NR1533 (MR IO Module)
1125Module Power Input
1129
Pwr+
Pwr -
BO_PhB_MR04_11108
1109 BI_PhB_MR04
Common11110
1115
1113 BO_PhB_MR02_2
BO_PhB_MR03_2
BO_PhB_MR04_21117
Common21119
1111 BO_PhB_MR01_2
1116
1114 BO_PhB_MR02_3
BO_PhB_MR03_3
BO_PhB_MR04_31118
Common31120
1112 BO_PhB_MR01_3
NR1533
1126
1124 BO_PhB_MR02_4
BO_PhB_MR03_4
BO_PhB_MR04_41128
Common41130
1122 BO_PhB_MR01_4
Figure 6.2-13 Pin definition of MR input and output module 6
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-27 Date: 2013-05-17
Pin No. Symbol Description
1101 ResetInput Reset input, when a reset signal arrives, the corresponding magnetic latched
contacts of mechanical signals are reset.
Mechanical signal inputs
1103 BI_PhB_MR01 Phase B input signal of MR1 mechanical relay.
1105 BI_PhB_MR02 Phase B input signal of MR2 mechanical relay.
1107 BI_PhB_MR03 Phase B input signal of MR3 mechanical relay.
1109 BI_PhB_MR04 Phase B input signal of MR4 mechanical relay.
1st group output contacts (magnetic latched contact) as annunciation signal
1110, 1102 BO_PhB_MR01_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR01] is energized.
1110, 1104 BO_PhB_MR02_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR02] is energized.
1110, 1106 BO_PhB_MR03_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR03] is energized.
1110, 1108 BO_PhB_MR04_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR04] is energized.
2nd group output contacts as MR repeating signal
1119, 1111 BO_PhB_MR01_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR01] is energized.
1119, 1113 BO_PhB_MR02_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR02] is energized.
1119, 1115 BO_PhB_MR03_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR03] is energized.
1119, 1117 BO_PhB_MR04_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR04] is energized.
3rd group output contacts as remote signal
1120, 1112 BO_PhB_MR01_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR01] is energized.
1120, 1114 BO_PhB_MR02_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR02] is energized.
1120, 1116 BO_PhB_MR03_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR03] is energized.
1120, 1118 BO_PhB_MR04_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR04] is energized.
4th group output contacts as disturbance&fault recording (DFR) signal
1130, 1122 BO_PhB_MR01_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR01] is energized.
1130, 1124 BO_PhB_MR02_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR02] is energized.
1130, 1126 BO_PhB_MR03_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR03] is energized.
1130, 1128 BO_PhB_MR04_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR04] is energized.
Power supply input of module
1125 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply
1129 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply
6.2.7.7 IO Module 7 at Slot 12 (NR1533)
The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of IO module 7 at slot 12 position.
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-28 Date: 2013-05-17
1207
1205
1203
1201 Reset Signal ResetInput
BI_PhB_MR05Binary Input
Signals of
Mechanical
protection
Hig
h V
olta
ge
BI_PhB_MR06
BI_PhB_MR07
1206
1204
1202 BO_PhB_MR05_1
BO_PhB_MR06_1
BO_PhB_MR07_1
NR1533 (MR IO Module)
1225Module Power Input
1229
Pwr+
Pwr -
BO_PhB_MR08_11208
1209 BI_PhB_MR08
Common11210
1215
1213 BO_PhB_MR06_2
BO_PhB_MR07_2
BO_PhB_MR08_21217
Common21219
1211 BO_PhB_MR05_2
1216
1214 BO_PhB_MR06_3
BO_PhB_MR07_3
BO_PhB_MR08_31218
Common31220
1212 BO_PhB_MR05_3
NR1533
1226
1224 BO_PhB_MR06_4
BO_PhB_MR07_4
BO_PhB_MR08_41228
Common41230
1222 BO_PhB_MR05_4
Figure 6.2-14 Pin definition of MR input and output module 7
Pin No. Symbol Description
1201 ResetInput Reset input, when a reset signal arrives, the corresponding magnetic latched
contacts of mechanical signals are reset.
Mechanical signal inputs
1203 BI_PhB_MR05 Phase B input signal of MR5 mechanical relay.
1205 BI_PhB_MR06 Phase B input signal of MR6 mechanical relay.
1207 BI_PhB_MR07 Phase B input signal of MR7 mechanical relay.
1209 BI_PhB_MR08 Phase B input signal of MR8 mechanical relay.
1st group output contacts (magnetic latched contact) as annunciation signal
1210, 1202 BO_PhB_MR05_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR05] is energized.
1210, 1204 BO_PhB_MR06_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR06] is energized.
1210, 1206 BO_PhB_MR07_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR07] is energized.
1210, 1208 BO_PhB_MR08_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR08] is energized.
2nd group output contacts as MR repeating signal
1219, 1211 BO_PhB_MR05_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR05] is energized.
1219, 1213 BO_PhB_MR06_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR06] is energized.
1219, 1215 BO_PhB_MR07_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR07] is energized.
1219, 1217 BO_PhB_MR08_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR08] is energized.
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-29 Date: 2013-05-17
Pin No. Symbol Description
3rd group output contacts as remote signal
1220, 1212 BO_PhB_MR05_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR05] is energized.
1220, 1214 BO_PhB_MR06_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR06] is energized.
1220, 1216 BO_PhB_MR07_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR07] is energized.
1220, 1218 BO_PhB_MR08_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR08] is energized.
4th group output contacts as disturbance&fault recording (DFR) signal
1230, 1222 BO_PhB_MR05_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR05] is energized.
1230, 1224 BO_PhB_MR06_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR06] is energized.
1230, 1226 BO_PhB_MR07_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR07] is energized.
1230, 1228 BO_PhB_MR08_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR08] is energized.
Power supply input of module
1225 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply
1229 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply
6.2.7.8 IO Module 8 at Slot 13 (NR1533)
The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of IO module 8 at slot 13 position.
1307
1305
1303
1301 Reset Signal ResetInput
BI_PhB_MR09Binary Input
Signals of
Mechanical
protection
Hig
h V
olta
ge
BI_PhB_MR10
BI_PhB_MR11
1306
1304
1302 BO_PhB_MR09_1
BO_PhB_MR10_1
BO_PhB_MR11_1
NR1533 (MR IO Module)
1325Module Power Input
1329
Pwr+
Pwr -
BO_PhB_MR12_11308
1309 BI_PhB_MR12
Common11310
1315
1313 BO_PhB_MR10_2
BO_PhB_MR11_2
BO_PhB_MR12_21317
Common21319
1311 BO_PhB_MR09_2
1316
1314 BO_PhB_MR10_3
BO_PhB_MR11_3
BO_PhB_MR12_31318
Common31320
1312 BO_PhB_MR09_3
NR1533
1326
1324 BO_PhB_MR10_4
BO_PhB_MR11_4
BO_PhB_MR12_41328
Common41330
1322 BO_PhB_MR09_4
Figure 6.2-15 Pin definition of MR input and output module 8
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-30 Date: 2013-05-17
Pin No. Symbol Description
1301 ResetInput Reset input, when a reset signal arrives, the corresponding magnetic latched
contacts of mechanical signals are reset.
Mechanical signal inputs
1303 BI_PhB_MR09 Phase B input signal of MR9 mechanical relay.
1305 BI_PhB_MR10 Phase B input signal of MR10 mechanical relay.
1307 BI_PhB_MR11 Phase B input signal of MR11 mechanical relay.
1309 BI_PhB_MR12 Phase B input signal of MR12 mechanical relay.
1st group output contacts (magnetic latched contact) as annunciation signal
1310, 1302 BO_PhB_MR09_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR09] is energized.
1310, 1304 BO_PhB_MR10_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR10] is energized.
1310, 1306 BO_PhB_MR11_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR11] is energized.
1310, 1308 BO_PhB_MR12_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR12] is energized.
2nd group output contacts as MR repeating signal
1319, 1311 BO_PhB_MR09_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR09] is energized.
1319, 1313 BO_PhB_MR10_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR10] is energized.
1319, 1315 BO_PhB_MR11_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR11] is energized.
1319, 1317 BO_PhB_MR12_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR12] is energized.
3rd group output contacts as remote signal
1320, 1312 BO_PhB_MR09_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR09] is energized.
1320, 1314 BO_PhB_MR10_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR10] is energized.
1320, 1316 BO_PhB_MR11_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR11] is energized.
1320, 1318 BO_PhB_MR12_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR12] is energized.
4th group output contacts as disturbance&fault recording (DFR) signal
1330, 1322 BO_PhB_MR09_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR09] is energized.
1330, 1324 BO_PhB_MR10_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR10] is energized.
1330, 1326 BO_PhB_MR11_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR11] is energized.
1330, 1328 BO_PhB_MR12_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR12] is energized.
Power supply input of module
1325 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply
1329 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply
6.2.7.9 IO Module 9 at Slot 14 (NR1533)
The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of IO module 9 at slot 14 position.
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-31 Date: 2013-05-17
1407
1405
1403
1401 Reset Signal ResetInput
BI_PhB_MR13Binary Input
Signals of
Mechanical
protection
Hig
h V
olta
ge
BI_PhB_MR14
BI_PhB_MR15
1406
1404
1402 BO_PhB_MR13_1
BO_PhB_MR14_1
BO_PhB_MR15_1
NR1533 (MR IO Module)
1425Module Power Input
1429
Pwr+
Pwr -
BO_PhB_MR16_11408
1414 BI_PhB_MR16
Common11410
1415
1413 BO_PhB_MR14_2
BO_PhB_MR15_2
BO_PhB_MR16_21417
Common21419
1411 BO_PhB_MR13_2
1416
1414 BO_PhB_MR14_3
BO_PhB_MR15_3
BO_PhB_MR16_31418
Common31420
1412 BO_PhB_MR13_3
NR1533
1426
1424 BO_PhB_MR14_4
BO_PhB_MR15_4
BO_PhB_MR16_41428
Common41430
1422 BO_PhB_MR13_4
Figure 6.2-16 Pin definition of MR input and output module 9
Pin No. Symbol Description
1401 ResetInput Reset input, when a reset signal arrives, the corresponding magnetic latched
contacts of mechanical signals are reset.
Mechanical signal inputs
1403 BI_PhB_MR13 Mechanical relay (MR) signal input 13
1405 BI_PhB_MR14 Mechanical relay (MR) signal input 14
1407 BI_PhB_MR15 Mechanical relay (MR) signal input 15
1409 BI_PhB_MR16 Mechanical relay (MR) signal input 16
1st group output contacts (magnetic latched contact) as annunciation signal
1410, 1402 BO_PhB_MR13_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR13] is energized.
1410, 1404 BO_PhB_MR14_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR14] is energized.
1410, 1406 BO_PhB_MR15_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR15] is energized.
1410, 1408 BO_PhB_MR16_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR16] is energized.
2nd group output contacts as MR repeating signal
1419, 1411 BO_PhB_MR13_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR13] is energized.
1419, 1413 BO_PhB_MR14_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR14] is energized.
1419, 1415 BO_PhB_MR15_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhA_MR15] is energized.
1419, 1417 BO_PhB_MR16_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR16] is energized.
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-32 Date: 2013-05-17
Pin No. Symbol Description
3rd group output contacts as remote signal
1420, 1412 BO_PhB_MR13_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR13] is energized.
1420, 1414 BO_PhB_MR14_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR14] is energized.
1420, 1416 BO_PhB_MR15_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR15] is energized.
1420, 1418 BO_PhB_MR16_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR16] is energized.
4th group output contacts as disturbance&fault recording (DFR) signal
1430, 1422 BO_PhB_MR13_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR13] is energized.
1430, 1424 BO_PhB_MR14_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR14] is energized.
1430, 1426 BO_PhB_MR15_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR15] is energized.
1430, 1428 BO_PhB_MR16_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR16] is energized.
Power supply input of module
1425 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply
1429 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply
6.2.7.10 IO Module 10 at Slot 15 (NR1533)
The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of IO module 10 at slot 15 position.
1507
1505
1503
1501 Reset Signal ResetInput
BI_PhB_MR17Binary Input
Signals of
Mechanical
protection
Hig
h V
olta
ge
BI_PhB_MR18
BI_PhB_MR19
1506
1504
1502 BO_PhB_MR17_1
BO_PhB_MR18_1
BO_PhB_MR19_1
NR1533 (MR IO Module)
1525Module Power Input
1529
Pwr+
Pwr -
BO_PhB_MR20_11508
1509 BI_PhB_MR20
Common11510
1515
1513 BO_PhB_MR18_2
BO_PhB_MR19_2
BO_PhB_MR20_21517
Common21519
1511 BO_PhB_MR17_2
1516
1514 BO_PhB_MR18_3
BO_PhB_MR19_3
BO_PhB_MR20_31518
Common31520
1512 BO_PhB_MR17_3
NR1533
1526
1524 BO_PhB_MR18_4
BO_PhB_MR19_4
BO_PhB_MR20_41528
Common41530
1522 BO_PhB_MR17_4
Figure 6.2-17 Pin definition of MR input and output module 10
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-33 Date: 2013-05-17
Pin No. Symbol Description
1501 ResetInput Reset input, when a reset signal arrives, the corresponding magnetic latched
contacts of mechanical signals are reset.
Mechanical signal inputs
1503 BI_PhB_MR17 Phase B input signal of MR17 mechanical relay.
1505 BI_PhB_MR18 Phase B input signal of MR18 mechanical relay.
1507 BI_PhB_MR19 Phase B input signal of MR19 mechanical relay.
1509 BI_PhB_MR20 Phase B input signal of MR20 mechanical relay.
1st group output contacts (magnetic latched contact) as annunciation signal
1510, 1502 BO_PhB_MR17_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR17] is energized.
1510, 1504 BO_PhB_MR18_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR18] is energized.
1510, 1506 BO_PhB_MR19_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR19] is energized.
1510, 1508 BO_PhB_MR20_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR20] is energized.
2nd group output contacts as MR repeating signal
1519, 1511 BO_PhB_MR17_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR17] is energized.
1519, 1513 BO_PhB_MR18_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR18] is energized.
1519, 1515 BO_PhB_MR19_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR19] is energized.
1519, 1517 BO_PhB_MR20_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR20] is energized.
3rd group output contacts as remote signal
1520, 1512 BO_PhB_MR17_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR17] is energized.
1520, 1514 BO_PhB_MR18_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR18] is energized.
1520, 1516 BO_PhB_MR19_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR19] is energized.
1520, 1518 BO_PhB_MR20_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR20] is energized.
4th group output contacts as disturbance&fault recording (DFR) signal
1530, 1522 BO_PhB_MR17_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR17] is energized.
1530, 1524 BO_PhB_MR18_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR18] is energized.
1530, 1526 BO_PhB_MR19_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR19] is energized.
1530, 1528 BO_PhB_MR20_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR20] is energized.
Power supply input of module
1525 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply
1529 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply
6.2.7.11 IO Module 11 at Slot 25 (NR1533)
The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of IO module 11 at slot 25 position.
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-34 Date: 2013-05-17
2507
2505
2503
2501 Reset Signal ResetInput
BI_PhC_MR01Binary Input
Signals of
Mechanical
protection
Hig
h V
olta
ge
BI_PhC_MR02
BI_PhC_MR03
2506
2504
2502 BO_PhC_MR01_1
BO_PhC_MR02_1
BO_PhC_MR03_1
NR1533 (MR IO Module)
2525Module Power Input
2529
Pwr+
Pwr -
BO_PhC_MR04_12508
2509 BI_PhC_MR04
Common12510
2515
2513 BO_PhC_MR02_2
BO_PhC_MR03_2
BO_PhC_MR04_22517
Common22519
2511 BO_PhC_MR01_2
2516
2514 BO_PhC_MR02_3
BO_PhC_MR03_3
BO_PhC_MR04_32518
Common32520
2512 BO_PhC_MR01_3
NR1533
2526
2524 BO_PhC_MR02_4
BO_PhC_MR03_4
BO_PhC_MR04_42528
Common42530
2522 BO_PhC_MR01_4
Figure 6.2-18 Pin definition of MR input and output module 11
Pin No. Symbol Description
2501 ResetInput Reset input, when a reset signal arrives, the corresponding magnetic latched
contacts of mechanical signals are reset.
Mechanical signal inputs
2503 BI_PhC_MR01 Phase C input signal of MR1 mechanical relay.
2505 BI_PhC_MR02 Phase C input signal of MR2 mechanical relay.
2507 BI_PhC_MR03 Phase C input signal of MR3 mechanical relay.
2509 BI_PhC_MR04 Phase C input signal of MR4 mechanical relay.
1st group output contacts (magnetic latched contact) as annunciation signal
2510, 2502 BO_PhC_MR01_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR01] is energized.
2510, 2504 BO_PhC_MR02_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR02] is energized.
2510, 2506 BO_PhC_MR03_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR03] is energized.
2510, 2508 BO_PhC_MR04_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR04] is energized.
2nd group output contacts as MR repeating signal
2519, 2511 BO_PhC_MR01_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR01] is energized.
2519, 2513 BO_PhC_MR02_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR02] is energized.
2519, 2515 BO_PhC_MR03_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR03] is energized.
2519, 2517 BO_PhC_MR04_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR04] is energized.
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-35 Date: 2013-05-17
Pin No. Symbol Description
3rd group output contacts as remote signal
2520, 2512 BO_PhC_MR01_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR01] is energized.
2520, 2514 BO_PhC_MR02_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR02] is energized.
2520, 2516 BO_PhC_MR03_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR03] is energized.
2520, 2518 BO_PhC_MR04_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR04] is energized.
4th group output contacts as disturbance&fault recording (DFR) signal
2530, 2522 BO_PhC_MR01_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR01] is energized.
2530, 2524 BO_PhC_MR02_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR02] is energized.
2530, 2526 BO_PhC_MR03_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR03] is energized.
2530, 2528 BO_PhC_MR04_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR04] is energized.
Power supply input of module
2525 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply
2529 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply
6.2.7.12 IO Module 12 at Slot 26 (NR1533)
The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of IO module 12 at slot 26 position.
2607
2605
2603
2601 Reset Signal ResetInput
BI_PhC_MR05Binary Input
Signals of
Mechanical
protection
Hig
h V
olta
ge
BI_PhC_MR06
BI_PhC_MR07
2606
2604
2602 BO_PhC_MR05_1
BO_PhC_MR06_1
BO_PhC_MR07_1
NR1533 (MR IO Module)
2625Module Power Input
2629
Pwr+
Pwr -
BO_PhC_MR08_12608
2609 BI_PhC_MR08
Common12610
2615
2613 BO_PhC_MR06_2
BO_PhC_MR07_2
BO_PhC_MR08_22617
Common22619
2611 BO_PhC_MR05_2
2616
2614 BO_PhC_MR06_3
BO_PhC_MR07_3
BO_PhC_MR08_32618
Common32620
2612 BO_PhC_MR05_3
NR1533
2626
2624 BO_PhC_MR06_4
BO_PhC_MR07_4
BO_PhC_MR08_42628
Common42630
2622 BO_PhC_MR05_4
Figure 6.2-19 Pin definition of MR input and output module 12
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-36 Date: 2013-05-17
Pin No. Symbol Description
2601 ResetInput Reset input, when a reset signal arrives, the corresponding magnetic latched
contacts of mechanical signals are reset.
Mechanical signal inputs
2603 BI_PhC_MR05 Phase C input signal of MR5 mechanical relay.
2605 BI_PhC_MR06 Phase C input signal of MR6 mechanical relay.
2607 BI_PhC_MR07 Phase C input signal of MR7 mechanical relay.
2609 BI_PhC_MR08 Phase C input signal of MR8 mechanical relay.
1st group output contacts (magnetic latched contact) as annunciation signal
2610, 2602 BO_PhC_MR05_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR05] is energized.
2610, 2604 BO_PhC_MR06_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR06] is energized.
2610, 2606 BO_PhC_MR07_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR07] is energized.
2610, 2608 BO_PhC_MR08_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR08] is energized.
2nd group output contacts as MR repeating signal
2619, 2611 BO_PhC_MR05_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR05] is energized.
2619, 2613 BO_PhC_MR06_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR06] is energized.
2619, 2615 BO_PhC_MR07_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR07] is energized.
2619, 2617 BO_PhC_MR08_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR08] is energized.
3rd group output contacts as remote signal
2620, 2612 BO_PhC_MR05_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR05] is energized.
2620, 2614 BO_PhC_MR06_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR06] is energized.
2620, 2616 BO_PhC_MR07_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR07] is energized.
2620, 2618 BO_PhC_MR08_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR08] is energized.
4th group output contacts as disturbance&fault recording (DFR) signal
2630, 2622 BO_PhC_MR5_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR05] is energized.
2630, 2624 BO_PhC_MR6_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR06] is energized.
2630, 2626 BO_PhC_MR7_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR07] is energized.
2630, 2628 BO_PhC_MR8_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR08] is energized.
Power supply input of module
2625 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply
2629 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply
6.2.7.13 IO Module 13 at Slot 27 (NR1533)
The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of IO module 13 at slot 27 position.
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-37 Date: 2013-05-17
2707
2705
2703
2701 Reset Signal ResetInput
BI_PhC_MR09Binary Input
Signals of
Mechanical
protection
Hig
h V
olta
ge
BI_PhC_MR10
BI_PhC_MR11
2706
2704
2702 BO_PhC_MR09_1
BO_PhC_MR10_1
BO_PhC_MR11_1
NR1533 (MR IO Module)
2725Module Power Input
2729
Pwr+
Pwr -
BO_PhC_MR12_12708
2709 BI_PhC_MR12
Common12710
2715
2713 BO_PhC_MR10_2
BO_PhC_MR11_2
BO_PhC_MR12_22717
Common22719
2711 BO_PhC_MR09_2
2716
2714 BO_PhC_MR10_3
BO_PhC_MR11_3
BO_PhC_MR12_32718
Common32720
2712 BO_PhC_MR09_3
NR1533
2726
2724 BO_PhC_MR10_4
BO_PhC_MR11_4
BO_PhC_MR12_42728
Common42730
2722 BO_PhC_MR09_4
Figure 6.2-20 Pin definition of MR input and output module 13
Pin No. Symbol Description
2701 ResetInput Reset input, when a reset signal arrives, the corresponding magnetic latched
contacts of mechanical signals are reset.
Mechanical signal inputs
2703 BI_PhC_MR09 Phase C input signal of MR9 mechanical relay.
2705 BI_PhC_MR10 Phase C input signal of MR10 mechanical relay.
2707 BI_PhC_MR11 Phase C input signal of MR11 mechanical relay.
2709 BI_PhC_MR12 Phase C input signal of MR12 mechanical relay.
1st group output contacts (magnetic latched contact) as annunciation signal
2710, 2702 BO_PhC_MR9_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR09] is energized.
2710, 2704 BO_PhC_MR10_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR10] is energized.
2710, 2706 BO_PhC_MR11_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR11] is energized.
2710, 2708 BO_PhC_MR12_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR12] is energized.
2nd group output contacts as MR repeating signal
2719, 2711 BO_PhC_MR9_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR09] is energized.
2719, 2713 BO_PhC_MR10_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR10] is energized.
2719, 2715 BO_PhC_MR11_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR11] is energized.
2719, 2717 BO_PhC_MR12_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR12] is energized.
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-38 Date: 2013-05-17
Pin No. Symbol Description
3rd group output contacts as remote signal
2720, 2712 BO_PhC_MR9_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR09] is energized.
2720, 2714 BO_PhC_MR10_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR10] is energized.
2720, 2716 BO_PhC_MR11_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR11] is energized.
2720, 2718 BO_PhC_MR12_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR12] is energized.
4th group output contacts as disturbance&fault recording (DFR) signal
2730, 2722 BO_PhC_MR9_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR09] is energized.
2730, 2724 BO_PhC_MR10_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR10] is energized.
2730, 2726 BO_PhC_MR11_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR11] is energized.
2730, 2728 BO_PhC_MR12_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR12] is energized.
Power supply input of module
2725 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply
2729 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply
6.2.7.14 IO Module 14 at Slot 28 (NR1533)
The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of IO module 14 at slot 28 position.
2807
2805
2803
2801 Reset Signal ResetInput
BI_PhC_MR13Binary Input
Signals of
Mechanical
protection
Hig
h V
olta
ge
BI_PhC_MR14
BI_PhC_MR15
2806
2804
2802 BO_PhC_MR13_1
BO_PhC_MR14_1
BO_PhC_MR15_1
NR1533 (MR IO Module)
2825Module Power Input
2829
Pwr+
Pwr -
BO_PhC_MR16_12808
2828 BI_PhC_MR16
Common12810
2815
2813 BO_PhC_MR14_2
BO_PhC_MR15_2
BO_PhC_MR16_22817
Common22819
2811 BO_PhC_MR13_2
2816
2814 BO_PhC_MR14_3
BO_PhC_MR15_3
BO_PhC_MR16_32818
Common32820
2812 BO_PhC_MR13_3
NR1533
2826
2824 BO_PhC_MR14_4
BO_PhC_MR15_4
BO_PhC_MR16_42828
Common42830
2822 BO_PhC_MR13_4
Figure 6.2-21 Pin definition of MR input and output module 14
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-39 Date: 2013-05-17
Pin No. Symbol Description
2801 ResetInput Reset input, when a reset signal arrives, the corresponding magnetic latched
contacts of mechanical signals are reset.
Mechanical signal inputs
2803 BI_PhC_MR13 Phase C input signal of MR13 mechanical relay.
2805 BI_PhC_MR14 Phase C input signal of MR14 mechanical relay.
2807 BI_PhC_MR15 Phase C input signal of MR15 mechanical relay.
2809 BI_PhC_MR16 Phase C input signal of MR16 mechanical relay.
1st group output contacts (magnetic latched contact) as annunciation signal
2810, 2802 BO_PhC_MR13_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR13] is energized.
2810, 2804 BO_PhC_MR14_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR14] is energized.
2810, 2806 BO_PhC_MR15_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR15] is energized.
2810, 2808 BO_PhC_MR16_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR16] is energized.
2nd group output contacts as MR repeating signal
2819, 2811 BO_PhC_MR13_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR13] is energized.
2819, 2813 BO_PhC_MR14_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR14] is energized.
2819, 2815 BO_PhC_MR15_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR15] is energized.
2819, 2817 BO_PhC_MR16_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR16] is energized.
3rd group output contacts as remote signal
2820, 2812 BO_PhC_MR13_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR13] is energized.
2820, 2814 BO_PhC_MR14_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhB_MR14] is energized.
2820, 2816 BO_PhC_MR15_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR15] is energized.
2820, 2818 BO_PhC_MR16_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR16] is energized.
4th group output contacts as disturbance&fault recording (DFR) signal
2830, 2822 BO_PhC_MR13_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR13] is energized.
2830, 2824 BO_PhC_MR14_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR14] is energized.
2830, 2826 BO_PhC_MR15_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR15] is energized.
2830, 2828 BO_PhC_MR16_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR16] is energized.
Power supply input of module
2825 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply
2829 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply
6.2.7.15 IO Module 15 at Slot 29 (NR1533)
The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of IO module 15 at slot 29 position.
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-40 Date: 2013-05-17
2907
2905
2903
2901 Reset Signal ResetInput
BI_PhC_MR17Binary Input
Signals of
Mechanical
protection
Hig
h V
olta
ge
BI_PhC_MR18
BI_PhC_MR19
2906
2904
2902 BO_PhC_MR17_1
BO_PhC_MR18_1
BO_PhC_MR19_1
NR1533 (MR IO Module)
2925Module Power Input
2929
Pwr+
Pwr -
BO_PhC_MR20_12908
2909 BI_PhC_MR20
Common12910
2929
2913 BO_PhC_MR18_2
BO_PhC_MR19_2
BO_PhC_MR20_22917
Common22919
2911 BO_PhC_MR17_2
2916
2914 BO_PhC_MR18_3
BO_PhC_MR19_3
BO_PhC_MR20_32918
Common32920
2912 BO_PhC_MR17_3
NR1533
2926
2924 BO_PhC_MR18_4
BO_PhC_MR19_4
BO_PhC_MR20_42928
Common42930
2922 BO_PhC_MR17_4
Figure 6.2-22 Pin definition of MR input and output module 15
Pin No. Symbol Description
2901 ResetInput Reset input, when a reset signal arrives, the corresponding magnetic latched
contacts of mechanical signals are reset.
Mechanical signal inputs
2903 BI_PhC_MR17 Phase C input signal of MR17 mechanical relay.
2905 BI_PhC_MR18 Phase C input signal of MR18 mechanical relay.
2907 BI_PhC_MR19 Phase C input signal of MR19 mechanical relay.
2909 BI_PhC_MR20 Phase C input signal of MR20 mechanical relay.
1st group output contacts (magnetic latched contact) as annunciation signal
2910, 2902 BO_PhC_MR17_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR17] is energized.
2910, 2904 BO_PhC_MR18_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR18] is energized.
2910, 2906 BO_PhC_MR19_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR19] is energized.
2910, 2908 BO_PhC_MR20_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR20] is energized.
2nd group output contacts as MR repeating signal
2919, 2911 BO_PhC_MR17_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR17] is energized.
2919, 2913 BO_PhC_MR18_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR18] is energized.
2919, 2915 BO_PhC_MR19_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR19] is energized.
2919, 2917 BO_PhC_MR20_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR20] is energized.
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-41 Date: 2013-05-17
Pin No. Symbol Description
3rd group output contacts as remote signal
2920, 2912 BO_PhC_MR17_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR17] is energized.
2920, 2914 BO_PhC_MR18_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR18] is energized.
2920, 2916 BO_PhC_MR19_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR19] is energized.
2920, 2918 BO_PhC_MR20_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR20] is energized.
4th group output contacts as disturbance&fault recording (DFR) signal
2930, 2922 BO_PhC_MR17_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR17] is energized.
2930, 2924 BO_PhC_MR18_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR18] is energized.
2930, 2926 BO_PhC_MR19_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR19] is energized.
2930, 2928 BO_PhC_MR20_4 NO contact, is closed when binary input [BI_PhC_MR20] is energized.
Power supply input of module
2925 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply
2929 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the board connected to DC power supply
6.2.8 RLY Output Module (Relay Output )
Two relay output modules (NR1544) are equipped at slot 22 and slot 24, which are used to extend
more tripping output contacts.
6.2.8.1 Relay Module 1 at Slot 22 (NR1544)
The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of relay output module 1 at slot 22
position.
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-42 Date: 2013-05-17
NR1544
2206
2205
2213
2207
2215
2214
2211
2210
2204
2203
2208
2209
2222
2221
2218
2212
2220
2219
22161
st g
rou
p o
f tr
ip o
utp
ut co
nta
cts
22172
nd
gro
up
of tr
ip o
utp
ut co
nta
cts
BO_Trp_1
2223
2202
2224
2225
2226
2228
2201 Input1
2227 Common
BO_LossPwr_MR
An
nu
ncia
tio
n
Sig
na
l
Signal Input
(high voltage +) Input2
2229Module Power Input
2230
Pwr +
From power supply -
From power supply +
Pwr -
BO_Trp_2
BO_Trp_3
BO_Trp_4
BO_Trp_5
BO_Trp_6
BO_Trp_7
BO_Trp_8
BO_Trp_9
BO_Trp_10
BO_Trp_11
BO_Trp_12
Figure 6.2-23 Pin definition of relay output module 1
Pin No. Sign Description
2229 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the module connected to DC power supply
2230 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the module connected to DC power supply
Signal input
2201 Input1 Signal input to initiate the 1st group of trip output contacts
2202 Input2 Signal input to initiate the 2nd group of trip output contacts
1st Group of trip output contacts
2203, 2204 BO_Trp_1
NO contacts, are closed when pin 2201 is energized by DC high voltage.
2205, 2206 BO_Trp_2
2207, 2208 BO_Trp_3
2209, 2210 BO_Trp_4
2211, 2212 BO_Trp_5
2213, 2214 BO_Trp_6
2nd group of trip output contacts
2215, 2216 BO_Trp_7
NO contacts, are closed when pin 2201 is energized by DC high voltage. 2217, 2218 BO_Trp_8
2219, 2220 BO_Trp_9
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-43 Date: 2013-05-17
Pin No. Sign Description
2221, 2222 BO_Trp_10
2223, 2224 BO_Trp_11
2225, 2226 BO_Trp_12
Annunciation signals (magnetic latched contact)
2227, 2228 BO_LossPwr_MR NC contact, is closed when power of this board is lost.
6.2.8.2 Relay Module 1 at Slot 24 (NR1544)
The following figure shows the rear view and pin definition of relay output module 1 at slot 24
position.
NR1544
2406
2405
2413
2407
2415
2414
2411
2410
2404
2403
2408
2409
2422
2421
2418
2412
2420
2419
2416
1st g
rou
p o
f tr
ip o
utp
ut co
nta
cts
2417
2n
d g
rou
p o
f tr
ip o
utp
ut co
nta
cts
BO_Trp_1
2423
2402
2424
2425
2426
2428
2401 Input1
2427 Common
BO_LossPwr_MR
An
nu
ncia
tio
n
Sig
na
l
Signal Input
(high voltage +) Input2
2429Module Power Input
2430
Pwr +
From power supply -
From power supply +
Pwr -
BO_Trp_2
BO_Trp_3
BO_Trp_4
BO_Trp_5
BO_Trp_6
BO_Trp_7
BO_Trp_8
BO_Trp_9
BO_Trp_10
BO_Trp_11
BO_Trp_12
Figure 6.2-24 Pin definition of relay output module 1
Pin No. Sign Description
2429 Pwr+ Positive pole of power of the module connected to DC power supply
2430 Pwr- Negative pole of power of the module connected to DC power supply
Signal input
2401 Input1 Signal input to initiate the 1st group of trip output contacts
2402 Input2 Signal input to initiate the 2nd group of trip output contacts
1st Group of trip output contacts
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-44 Date: 2013-05-17
Pin No. Sign Description
2403, 2404 BO_Trp_1
NO contacts, are closed when pin 2401 is energized by DC high voltage.
2405, 2406 BO_Trp_2
2407, 2408 BO_Trp_3
2409, 2410 BO_Trp_4
2411, 2412 BO_Trp_5
2413, 2414 BO_Trp_6
2nd group of trip output contacts
2415, 2416 BO_Trp_7
NO contacts, are closed when pin 2401 is energized by DC high voltage.
2417, 2418 BO_Trp_8
2419, 2420 BO_Trp_9
2421, 2422 BO_Trp_10
2423, 2424 BO_Trp_11
2425, 2426 BO_Trp_12
Annunciation signals (magnetic latched contact)
2427, 2428 BO_LossPwr_MR NC contact, is closed when power of this board is lost.
6.2.9 AC AI Module (AC Analog Input)
6.2.9.1 AC Analog Input Module (NR1401)
The protection device which supports ECVT should not be equipped with this module. The analog
input module can transform these high AC input values to relevant low AC output value for the
DSP module. The transformers are used both to step-down the currents and voltages to levels
appropriate to the electronic circuitry of this device and to provide effective isolation between this
device and the power system. A low pass filter circuit is connected to each transformer (CT or VT)
secondary circuit for reducing the noise of each analog AC input signal.
NOTE! The rated value of the input current transformer is optional: 1A or 5A. The rated
value of the CT must be definitely declared in the technical scheme and the contract.
NOTE! Because the rated value of the input current transformer is optional, it is
necessary to check whether the rated values of the current transformer inputs are
accordant to the demand of the engineering before putting the device into operation.
A 24-pin connector is fixed on the front of this module. The pin definition of the connector is
described as below.
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-45 Date: 2013-05-17
NR1401
NR1401
01
03
05
07
09
11
13
15
17
19
02
04
06
08
10
12
14
16
18
20
U2
U3 U3n
I6
21
23
22
24
U4
U5
U6
U4n
U6n
U5n
I1 I1n
I2 I2n
I3 I3n
I4 I4n
I5 I5n
I6n
U2n
U1 U1n
Figure 6.2-25 Pin definition of AC analog output module
NOTE! In above figure, I1, I2, I3, I4, I5, I6, I7, I8, I9, I10, I11, I12 and U1, U2, U3, U4,
U5, U6 are polarity terminals of corresponding relevant voltage and current inputs
respectively.
NOTE! If user needs other analog input configuration, please declare in the technical
scheme and the contract.
The pin definition of the AC analog input module at slot 04 is shown as follows.
Pin No. Original
Symbol
New-defined
Symbol Description
0401 I1 Ia The phase A current input.
0402 I1n Ian
0403 I2 Ib The phase B current input.
0404 I2n Ibn
0405 I3 Ic The phase C current input.
0406 I3n Icn
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-46 Date: 2013-05-17
Pin No. Original
Symbol
New-defined
Symbol Description
0407 I4 Not used
0408 I4n
0409 I5 Not used
0410 I5n
0411 I6 Not used
0412 I6n
0413 U1 Not used
0414 U1n
0415 U2 Not used
0416 U2n
0417 U3 Not used
0418 U3n
0419 U4 Not used
0420 U4n
0421 U5 Not used
0422 U5n
0423 U6 Not used
0424 U6n
6.2.9.2 CT Requirement
-Rated primary current Ipn:
According to the rated current or maximum load current of primary apparatus.
-Rated continuous thermal current Icth:
According to the maximum load current.
-Rated short-time thermal current Ith and rated dynamic current Idyn:
According to the maximum fault current.
-Rated secondary current Isn
-Accuracy limit factor Kalf:
Ipn Rated primary current (amps)
Icth Rated continuous thermal current (amps)
Ith Rated short-time thermal current (amps)
Idyn Rated dynamic current (amps)
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-47 Date: 2013-05-17
Isn Rated secondary current (amps)
Kalf Accuracy limit factor
Kalf = Ipal / Ipn
Ipal Rated accuracy limit primary current (amps)
Ipn Rated primary current (amps)
Performance verification
Esl > Esl’
Esl Rated secondary limiting e.m.f (volts)
Esl = kalf*Isn*(Rct+Rbn)
Kalf Accuracy limit factor
Kalf =Ipal/Ipn
Ipal Rated accuracy limit primary current (amps)
Ipn Rated primary current (amps)
Isn Rated secondary current (amps)
Rct Current transformer secondary winding resistance. (ohms)
Rbn Rated resistance burden(ohms)
Rbn=Sbn/Isn2
Sbn Rated burden (VAs)
Esl’ Required secondary limiting e.m.f (volts)
Esl’ = k*Ipcf *Isn*(Rct+Rb)/Ipn
k Stability factor = 2
Ipcf Protective checking factor current (amps)
Same as the maximum prospective fault current
Isn Rated secondary current (amps)
Rct Current transformer secondary winding resistance. (ohms)
Rb Real resistance burden (ohms)
Rb =Rr+2*RL+ RC
RC Contact resistance, 0.05-0.1 ohm(ohms)
RL Resistance of a single lead from relay to current
transformer(ohms)
Rr Impedance of relay phase current input (ohms)
Ipn Rated primary current (amps)
For example,Kalf=30, Isn=5A, Rct=1ohm, Sbn=60VA
Esl = kalf*Isn*(Rct+Rbn) = kalf*Isn*(Rct+ Sbn/Isn2)= 30*5*(1+60/52)=510V
Ipcf=40000A, RL=0.5ohm, Rr=0.1ohm, Rc=0.1ohm, Ipn=2000A
Esl’ = 2*Ipcf *Isn*(Rct+Rb)/Ipn= 2*Ipcf *Isn*(Rct+( Rr +2*RL+ RC))/Ipn
= 2*40000*5*(1+(0.1+2*0.5+0.1))/2000=440V
Esl > Esl’
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-48 Date: 2013-05-17
6.2.10 HMI Module
The display panel consists of liquid crystal display module, keyboard, LED and ARM processor.
The functions of ARM processor include display control of the liquid crystal display module,
keyboard processing, and exchanging data with the CPU through serial port etc. The liquid crystal
display module is a high-performance grand liquid crystal panel with soft back lighting, which has a
user-friendly interface and an extensive display range.
6.3 Scheme Diagram of Input and Output of MR
According to the difference of the importance of transformer MR protection, the mechanical signals
are classified into two groups described in the following sections. They may lead to different
equipment operation.
(1) MR signals (MR1~MR20, three phase signals) are repeated to issue trip command directly are
connected to the corresponding terminals of each phase to initiate trip output relays without
time delay and send out warning signals immediately.
(2) Some MR signals (MR1~MR4, three phase signals) are repeated to issue trip command with
time delay are connected to corresponding terminals of each phase to initiate trip output relays
with time delay which can be configured in the equipment, and send out warning signals
immediately.
NOTE! The wiring of binary input, signal output and tripping output of mechanical
protection is shown in the following figures, in which dashed lines are the external wiring
for panel design. The following design is only a recommended design which can be
changed according to user requirements by panel wiring designer.
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-49 Date: 2013-05-17
BI_PhA_MR5
BI_PhA_MR2
BI_PhA_MR8
BI_PhA_MR1
BI_PhA_MR6
BI_PhA_MR7
BI_PhA_MR10
BI_PhA_MR3
BI_PhA_MR9
BI_PhA_MR11
BI_PhA_MR12
Ph
ase
A b
ina
ry In
pu
t o
f M
ech
an
ica
l S
ign
als
BI_PhA_MR4
R
R
R
R
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
R
R
R
R
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
R
R
R
R
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
R
R
R
R
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAYBI_PhA_MR15
BI_PhA_MR13
BI_PhA_OilTemp
BI_PhA_MR16
Ext._Pwr + Ext._Pwr -
0629
0729
0829
0929
0603
0605
0607
0609
0703
0705
0707
0709
0803
0805
0807
0809
0903
0905
0907
0909
Contact from Transformer MR
R
R
R
R
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
10291003
1005
1007
1009
BI_PhA_MR19
BI_PhA_MR17
BI_PhA_MR18
BI_PhA_MR20
Figure 6.3-1 MR phase A input signals association diagram of PCS-974FG
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-50 Date: 2013-05-17
BI_PhB_MR5
BI_PhB_MR2
BI_PhB_MR8
BI_PhB_Cool
BI_PhB_MR6
BI_PhB_MR7
BI_PhB_MR10
BI_PhB_MR3
BI_PhB_MR9
BI_PhB_MR11
BI_PhB_MR12
Ph
ase
B b
ina
ry In
pu
t o
f M
ech
an
ica
l S
ign
als
BI_PhB_MR4
R
R
R
R
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
R
R
R
R
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
R
R
R
R
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
R
R
R
R
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAYBI_PhB_MR15
BI_PhB_MR13
BI_PhB_OilTemp
BI_PhB_MR16
Ext._Pwr + Ext._Pwr -
1129
1229
1329
1429
1103
1105
1107
1109
1203
1205
1207
1209
1303
1305
1307
1309
1403
1405
1407
1409
Contact from Transformer MR
R
R
R
R
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
15291503
1505
1507
1509
BI_PhB_MR19
BI_PhB_MR17
BI_PhB_MR18
BI_PhB_MR20
Figure 6.3-2 MR phase B input signals association diagram of PCS-974FG
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-51 Date: 2013-05-17
BI_PhC_MR5
BI_PhC_MR2
BI_PhC_MR8
BI_PhC_Cool
BI_PhC_MR6
BI_PhC_MR7
BI_PhC_MR10
BI_PhC_MR3
BI_PhC_MR9
BI_PhC_MR11
BI_PhC_MR12
Ph
ase
C b
ina
ry In
pu
t o
f M
ech
an
ica
l S
ign
als
BI_PhC_MR4
R
R
R
R
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
R
R
R
R
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
R
R
R
R
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
R
R
R
R
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAYBI_PhC_MR15
BI_PhC_MR13
BI_PhC_OilTemp
BI_PhC_MR16
Ext._Pwr + Ext._Pwr -
2529
2629
2729
2829
2503
2505
2507
2509
2603
2605
2607
2609
2703
2705
2707
2709
2803
2805
2807
2809
Contact from Transformer MR
R
R
R
R
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
29292903
2905
2907
2909
BI_PhC_MR19
BI_PhC_MR17
BI_PhC_MR18
BI_PhC_MR20
Figure 6.3-3 MR phase C input signals association diagram of PCS-974FG
6 Hardware Description
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 6-52 Date: 2013-05-17
BO_Trp_DlyMR2
BO_PhB_MR5
BO_PhA_MR5
BO_Trp_DlyMR1
BO_Trp_DlyMR3
BO_PhC_MR5
Sig
na
ls o
f M
R p
rote
ctio
n w
ith
tim
e d
ela
y to
in
itia
te trip
ou
tpu
t
rela
y
R
RS
ign
als
of M
R p
rote
ctio
n w
ith
ou
t T
ime
De
lay to
In
itia
te T
rip
Ou
tpu
t R
ela
y
1717
0719
1219
0711
1211
2202
2201 2230
Ext._Pwr +
Ext._Pwr +
Ext._Pwr -
Isolator LinkOutput Relay
Group1
Output Relay
Group2
BO_Trp_DlyMR4
R
R
2402
2401
Output Relay
Group1
Output Relay
Group2
2619 2611
0719
1219
0713
1213
2619 2613
0719
1219
0715
1215
2619 2615
0719
1219
0717
1217
2619 2617
0819
1319
0811
1311
2719 2711
BO_PhB_MR6
BO_PhA_MR6
BO_PhC_MR6
BO_PhB_MR7
BO_PhA_MR7
BO_PhC_MR7
BO_PhB_MR8
BO_PhA_MR8
BO_PhC_MR8
BO_PhB_MR9
BO_PhA_MR9
BO_PhC_MR9
2430
1719
1721
1723
1718
1720
1722
1724
Figure 6.3-4 MR tripping output contacts association diagram of PCS-974FG
6.4 Output Signals
PCS-974FG provides three kinds of signals for every event, remote signals, annunciation signals
and DFR signals. The event may be a mechanical signal from transformer mechanical relay, an
equipment failure, an equipment alarm or activation of pole-disagreement protection element.
All the signals are issued by closing the normal open contacts of signal relays whenever an event
happens. What matters is that the local signal relay is a bistable-relay, whenever an event
happens, the normal open contact of this relay will pick up and latch. The annunciation signal relay
will not drop off automatically after the event disappears except to reset manually. Annunciation
signal relays on two relay output modules can be reset by the reset button on the equipment front
panel or by the binary input [BI_RstTarg]. And annunciation signals on IO module can be reset by
a reset input terminal.
7 Settings
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 7-a
Date: 2013-05-17
7 Settings
Table of Contents
7.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Device Settings ................................................................................................ 7-1
7.3 Communication Settings ................................................................................ 7-1
7.4 System Settings ............................................................................................... 7-6
7.5 Protection Settings .......................................................................................... 7-6
7.6 Logic Links ....................................................................................................... 7-8
7.7 Label Settings .................................................................................................. 7-9
List of Tables
Table 7.2-1 Device setting list .................................................................................................. 7-1
Table 7.3-1 Communication setting list ................................................................................... 7-1
Table 7.4-1 System setting list ................................................................................................. 7-6
Table 7.5-1 Protection settings list .......................................................................................... 7-7
Table 7.6-1 Function logic link list ........................................................................................... 7-9
Table 7.7-1 Label setting list of MR .......................................................................................... 7-9
7 Settings
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 7-1
Date: 2013-05-17
7.1 Overview
The equipment has 10 setting groups for protection to coordinate with the mode of power system
operation, one of which is assigned to be active. However, common settings are shared by all
protection setting groups, and settings of protection element are set according to secondary
values.
7.2 Device Settings
Setting list
Table 7.2-1 Device setting list
No. Setting Item Range Description
1 HDR_EncodeMode GB18030, UTF-8
Select encoding format of header (HDR) file
COMTRADE recording file. Default value is
“UTF-8”.
2 Un_BinaryInput 24V, 48V, 110V, 220V Voltage level of binary input
Setting explanation
1. [HDR_EncodeMode]
The setting is to select encoding format of header file .Default value of [HDR_EncodeMode] is
1((i.e. UTF-8 code) and please set it to 0(i.e. GB18030) according to the special requirement.
2. [Un_BinaryInput]
The setting is used to set the voltage level of binary input module. 24V and 48V can be selected
when low-voltage BI module is equipped and 110V or 220V can be selected when high voltage
BI module is equipped.
Setting path
Access path in menu is:
Main menu -> Settings -> Device Setup -> Device Settings
7.3 Communication Settings
Setting list
Table 7.3-1 Communication setting list
No. Settings item Range Description
1 IP_LAN1 000.000.000.000~
255.255.255.255 IP address of Ethernet port 1.
7 Settings
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 7-2
Date: 2013-05-17
No. Settings item Range Description
2 Mask_LAN1 000.000.000.000~
255.255.255.255 Subnet mask of Ethernet port 1.
3 IP_LAN2 000.000.000.000~
255.255.255.255 IP address of Ethernet port 2.
4 Mask_LAN2 000.000.000.000~
255.255.255.255 Subnet mask of Ethernet port 2.
5 En_LAN2 0: disable, 1: enable Enable/disable the IP address of port 2.
6 IP_LAN3 0: disable, 1: enable IP address of Ethernet port 3.
7 Mask_LAN3 000.000.000.000~
255.255.255.255 Subnet mask of Ethernet port 3.
8 En_LAN3 0: disable, 1: enable Enable/disable the IP address of port 3.
9 IP_LAN4 0: disable, 1: enable IP address of Ethernet port 4.
10 Mask_LAN4 000.000.000.000~
255.255.255.255 Subnet mask of Ethernet port 4.
11 En_LAN4 0: disable, 1: enable Enable/disable the IP address of port 4.
12 Gateway 000.000.000.000~
255.255.255.255 Gateway of router
13 En_Broadcast 0: disable, 1: enable Enable/disable sending message in broadcast
mode via network. (IEC103).
14 Addr_RS485A 0~255
Communication address between the protective
device with the SCADA or RTU via RS-485 serial
port 1.
15 Baud_RS485A 4800,9600,19200,
38400,57600,115200 bps Baud rate of rear RS-485 serial port 1.
16 Protocol_RS485A 0~9
Communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial port
1.
0: IEC60870-5-103;
1: Modbus
2: Reserved
Others: Not available
17 Addr_RS485B 0~255
Communication address between the protective
device with the SCADA or RTU via RS-485 serial
port 2.
18 Baud_RS485B 4800,9600,19200,
38400,57600,115200 bps Baud rate of rear RS-485 serial port 2.
7 Settings
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 7-3
Date: 2013-05-17
No. Settings item Range Description
19 Protocol_RS485B 0~9
Communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial port
2.
0: IEC60870-5-103;
1: Modbus
2: Reserved
Others: Not available
20 Threshold_Measmt 0~100%
Threshold value of sending measurement values to
SCADA through IEC103 or IEC61850 protocol.
Default value: “1%”.
21 Period_Measmt 0~65535s
The time period when the equipment sends
measurement data to SCADA through IEC103
protocol.
Default value:“60”.
22 Format_Measmt 0, 1 Select the format of measurement data sent to
SCADA through IEC103 protocol.
23 Baud_Printer
4800,9600,
19200,38400, 57600,
115200 bps
Baud rate of printer port
24 En_AutoPrint 0: disable
1: enable Enable/disable automatic printing function
25 Opt_TimeSyn
Conventional
SAS
Advanced
NoTimeSyn
Select the mode of time synchronization of
equipment.
26 IP_Server_SNTP 000.000.000.000~
255.255.255.255
The address of the external SNTP clock
synchronization server sending SNTP message to
the equipment.
27 OffsetHour_UTC -12~12hrs The local time zone also referred to as the hour
offset hour from UTC .
28 OffsetMinute_UTC 0~60min The offset minute of local time from UTC.
29 Opt_Display_Status Primary value/
Second value
Select display measurement values is primary value
or secondary value
Setting explanation
1. [En_LANx] (x= 2, 3, 4)
These setting are used to enable/disable IP addresses of Ethernet 2, 3 and 4 respectively. IP
address of Ethernet 1 is enabled fixedly.
“1”: enable the IP address of Ethernet port and the corresponding IP address setting is needed to
be set.
7 Settings
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 7-4
Date: 2013-05-17
“0”: disable the IP address of Ethernet port and the corresponding IP address setting is not needed
to be set.
2. [En_Broadcast]
This setting is only used for IEC 103 protocol. If NR network IEC103 protocol is used, the setting
must be set as “1”.
0: the device does not send UDP messages through network;
1: the device sends UDP messages through network.
3. [Protocol_RS485x] (x=A, B)
The setting is used to select the communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial port X.
0: IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
1: Reserved
2: Modbus protocol
4. [Format_Measmt]
The setting is used to select the format of measurement data sent to SCADA through IEC103
protocol.
0: GDD data type through IEC103 protocol is 12;
1: GDD data type through IEC103 protocol is 7, i.e. 754 short real number of IEEE standard.
5. [En_AutoPrint]
If automatic print is required for disturbance report after protection operating, the setting should be
set as “1”.
6. [Opt_TimeSyn]
There are four selections for clock synchronization of device, each selection includes different time
clock synchronization signals shown in following table.
Item Description
Conventional
PPS(RS-485): Pulse per second (PPS) via RS-485 differential level.
IRIG-B(RS-485): IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level.
PPM(DIN): Pulse per minute (PPM) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn].
PPS(DIN): Pulse per second (PPS) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn].
SAS
SNTP(PTP): Unicast (point to point) SNTP mode via Ethernet network.
SNTP(BC): Broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network.
Message (IEC103): Clock messages through IEC103 protocol.
Advanced
IEEE1588: Clock message via IEEE1588.
IRIG-B(Fiber): IRIG-B via optical-fibre interface.
PPS(Fiber): Pulse per second (PPS) via optical-fibre interface.
NoTimeSyn When no time synchronization signal is connected to the equipment, please select
7 Settings
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 7-5
Date: 2013-05-17
Item Description
this option and the alarm message [Alm_TimeSync] will not be issued anymore.
“Conventional” mode and “SAS” mode are always be supported by device, but “Advanced” mode
is only supported when NET-DSP module is equipped. The alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn] may be
issued to remind user loss of time synchronization signals.
1) When “SAS” is selected, if there is no conventional clock synchronization signal, the device
will not send the alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn]. When “Conventional” mode is selected, if there
is no conventional clock synchronization signal, “SAS” mode will be enabled automatically
with the alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn] being issued simultaneously.
2) When “Advanced” mode is selected, if there is no conventional clock synchronization signal
connected to NET-DSP module,“SAS” mode is enabled automatically with the alarm signal
[Alm_TimeSyn] being issued simultaneously.
3) When “NoTimeSyn” mode is selected, the device will not send alarm signals without
NOTE! The clock message via IEC103 protocol is invalid when the device receives the
IRIG-B signal through RC-485 port.
7. [IP_Server_SNTP]
It is the address of the SNTP time synchronization server which sends SNTP timing messages to
the relay or BCU.
8. [OffsetHour_UTC], [OffsetMinute_UTC]
When the IEC61850 protocol is adopted in substations, if the time tags of communication
messages are required according to Universal Time Coordinated (UTC), the two settings are
used to set the local time of a country or area where the relay is installed. If there is no such a
requirement, the two settings must be set as “0”.
Example 1: In China where UTC offset is UTC +8:00, [OffsetHour_UTC] and [OffsetMinute_UTC]
should be set as “8hrs” and “0min” respectively.
Example 2: In Argentina where UTC offset is UTC-3:00, [OffsetHour_UTC] and
[OffsetMinute_UTC] should be set as “-3hrs” and “0min” respectively.
Example 3: In Nepal where UTC offset is UTC +5:45, [OffsetHour_UTC] and [OffsetMinute_UTC]
should be set as “+5hrs” and “45min” respectively.
Time zone GMT zone East 1st East 2nd East 3rd East 4th East 5th
Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5
Time zone East 6th East 7th East 8th East 9th East 10th East 11th
Setting 6 7 8 9 10 11
Time zone East/West 12th West 1st West 2nd West 3rd West 4th West 5th
Setting -12/12 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5
Time zone West 6th West 7th West 8th West 9th West 10th West 11th
7 Settings
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 7-6
Date: 2013-05-17
Setting -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11
Setting Path
Access path in menu is:
Main Menu -> Settings -> Device Setup -> Comm Settings
7.4 System Settings
Setting list
Table 7.4-1 System setting list
No. Setting Item Range Step Unit Description
1 Active_Grp 1~10 1 Current setting group.
2 PrimaryEquip_Name Max 20
characters
Name of the protected primary equipment, such as
transformer, line, etc.
3 I1n 0~60000 1 A Primary rated current of CT.
4 I2n 1A or 5A A Secondary rated current of CT.
NOTE! Symbol ”x” represents some side of transformer or VT/CT type only defined by
user through PCS-Explore software, which may be “HVS”(HV side), “MVS”(MV side),
etc.
Setting explanation
1. [ Active_Grp]
The current protection setting group number, and total 10 group settings are provided. The device
settings, communication settings and system settings, are common for all protection groups.
2. [I1n], [I2n]
Set those settings respectively according to the actual primary value and secondary value of CT.
Setting path
Access path in menu is:
Main Menu -> Settings -> System Settings
7.5 Protection Settings
NOTE! There are some symbols mentioned in the following sections and the meaning of
them is given here.
7 Settings
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 7-7
Date: 2013-05-17
In – rated secondary current of CT.
NOTE: All the protection settings in Table 7.5-1 must be configured on the base of
secondary value, where [I2n] is the secondary rated current of CT.
Table 7.5-1 Protection settings list
No. Setting Item Range Step Unit Description
1 62PD.3I0_Set 0.04~150 0.001 A Current setting of residual overcurrent element
for pole disagreement protection.
2 62PD.I2_Set 0.04~150 0.001 A
Current setting of negative-sequence
overcurrent element for pole disagreement
protection.
3 62PD.t1_Op 0~360 0.001 s Time delay of pole disagreement protection
delay 1.
4 62PD.t2_Op 0~360 0.001 s Time delay of pole disagreement protection
delay 2.
5 50BF.Ip_Set 0.04~150 0.001 A Current setting of phase overcurrent element for
breaker failure initiation.
6 50BF.3I0_Set 0.04~150 0.001 A Current setting of residual overcurrent element
for breaker failure initiation.
7 50BF.I2_Set 0.04~150 0.001 A Current setting of negative-sequence
overcurrent element for breaker failure initiation.
8 50BF.t1_Op 0~360 0.001 s Time delay of breaker failure initiation delay 1.
9 50BF.t2_Op 0~360 0.001 s Time delay of breaker failure initiation delay 2.
10 MR1.t_FixDly 0~12000 0.001 s Fixed time delay of MR1 for tripping.
11 MR1.t_OpDly 0~12000 0.001 s Time delay of MR1 for tripping.
12 MR2.t_FixDly 0~12000 0.001 s Fixed time delay of MR2 for tripping.
13 MR3.t_FixDly 0~12000 0.001 s Fixed time delay of MR3 for tripping.
14 MR4.t_FixDly 0~12000 0.001 s Fixed time delay of MR4 for tripping.
15 62PD.En_t1 0: disable
1: enable 1
Logic setting of enabling/disabling pole
disagreement protection delay 1.
16 62PD.En_t2 0: disable
1: enable 1
Logic setting of enabling/disabling pole
disagreement protection delay 2.
17 62PD.En_3I0 0: disable
1: enable 1
Logic setting of enabling/disabling residual
overcurrent element to control pole
disagreement protection.
18 62PD.En_I2 0: disable
1: enable 1
Logic setting of enabling/disabling
zero-sequence overcurrent element to control
pole disagreement protection.
19 62PD.En_Ip 0: disable
1: enable 1
Logic setting of enabling/disabling phase
overcurrent element to control pole
7 Settings
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 7-8
Date: 2013-05-17
No. Setting Item Range Step Unit Description
disagreement protection.
20 62PD.En_ExTrp_t2 0: disable
1: enable 1
Logic setting of enabling/disabling external
tripping signal to control pole disagreement
protection delay 2
21 50BF.En_t1 0: disable
1: enable 1
Logic setting of enabling/disabling breaker
failure initation delay 1.
22 50BF.En_t2 0: disable
1: enable 1
Logic setting of enabling/disabling breaker
failure initation delay 2.
23 50BF.En_3I0 0: disable
1: enable 1
Logic setting of enabling/disabling residual
overcurrent element to control breaker failure
initation.
24 50BF.En_I2 0: disable
1: enable 1
Logic setting of enabling/disabling
zero-sequence overcurrent element to control
breaker failure initation.
25 50BF.En_ExTrp_Ctrl 0: disable
1: enable 1
Logic setting of enabling/disabling external
tripping signal to control breaker failure initiation.
26 50BF.En_PD_Ctrl 0: disable
1: enable 1
Logic setting of enabling/disabling pole
disagreement position of CB to control breaker
failure initiation.
27 50BF.En_52a_Ctrl 0: disable
1: enable 1
Logic setting of enabling/disabling breaker NO
auxiliary contact to control breaker failure
initiation.
28 MR1.En_FixDly 0: disable
1: enable 1
Logic setting of enabling/disabling MR1 to issue
a trip command after delay [MR1.t_FixDly].
29 MR1.En_OpDly 0: disable
1: enable 1
Logic setting of enabling/disabling MR1
protection to issue a trip command after delay
[MR1.En_OpDly].
30 MR1.En_MR14CtrlMR1 0: disable
1: enable 1
Logic setting of enabling/disabling MR14 to
control MR1 protection.
31 MR2.En_FixDly 0: disable
1: enable 1
Logic setting of enabling/disabling MR2 to issue
a trip command after delay [MR2.t_Op].
32 MR3.En_FixDly 0: disable
1: enable 1
Logic setting of enabling/disabling MR3to issue
a trip command after delay [MR3.t_Op].
33 MR4.En_FixDly 0: disable
1: enable 1
Logic setting of enabling/disabling MR4 to issue
a trip command after delay [MR4.t_Op].
7.6 Logic Links
The logic link is one of the conditions that decide whether the relevant protection is in service,
when this relay is energized. Each logic iLink is an “AND” condition of enabling the relevant
protective element with the corresponding binary input and logic setting. Through SAS or
RTU, the virtual enabling binary input can be set as “1” or “0”; and it means that the relevant
7 Settings
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 7-9
Date: 2013-05-17
protection can be in service or out of service through remote command. It provides convenience
for operation management.
Setting List
Table 7.6-1 Function logic link list
No. Symbol Range Step Explanation
1 Link_RmtChgSetting 0: disable
1: enable 1
Logic link of enabling/disabling changing settings
remotely.
2 Link_RmtCtrlLink 0: disable
1: enable 1
Logic link of enabling/disabling changing VEBI
settings remotely.
3 Link_RmtChgGrp 0: disable
1: enable 1
Logic link of enabling/disabling changing current
active group remotely.
4 Link_En62PD 0: disable
1: enable 1
Logic link of enabling/disabling pole disagreement
protection.
5 Link_En50BF 0: disable
1: enable 1 Logic link of enabling breaker failure initiation.
6 Link_EnDlyMR 0: disable
1: enable 1
Logic link of enabling/disabling mechanical
protection tripping with time delay.
Setting Path
Main Menu -> Settings -> Logic Links->Function Links
7.7 Label Settings
These label settings are used to define MR signal to a specific MR name used on site. After new
definition of MR is applied, then MR signal will be display in specific MR name in printed report and
signals to SAS or RTU, but there are no changes for MR item in local LCD display.
The following label settings are used to define a MR sinal as a specific MR signal according to
user requirements.
Table 7.7-1 Label setting list of MR
No. Symbol Range Description
1 Name_MR1A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR1.
2 Name_MR2A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR2.
3 Name_MR3A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR3.
4 Name_MR4A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR4.
5 Name_MR5A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR5.
6 Name_MR6A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR6.
7 Name_MR7A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR7.
8 Name_MR8A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR8.
9 Name_MR9A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR9.
7 Settings
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 7-10
Date: 2013-05-17
No. Symbol Range Description
10 Name_MR10A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR10.
11 Name_MR11A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR11.
12 Name_MR12A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR12.
13 Name_MR13A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR13.
14 Name_MR14A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR14.
15 Name_MR15A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR15.
16 Name_MR16A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR16.
17 Name_MR17A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR17.
18 Name_MR18A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR18.
19 Name_MR19A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR19.
20 Name_MR20A Maximum 16 characters Name of phase A input signal of MR20.
21 Name_MR1B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR1.
22 Name_MR2B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR2.
23 Name_MR3B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR3.
24 Name_MR4B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR4.
25 Name_MR5B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR5.
26 Name_MR6B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR6.
27 Name_MR7B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR7.
28 Name_MR8B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR8.
29 Name_MR9B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR9.
30 Name_MR10B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR10.
31 Name_MR11B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR11.
32 Name_MR12B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR12.
33 Name_MR13B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR13.
34 Name_MR14B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR14.
35 Name_MR15B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR15.
36 Name_MR16B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B signal of MR16.
37 Name_MR17B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR17.
38 Name_MR18B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR18.
39 Name_MR19B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR19.
40 Name_MR20B Maximum 16 characters Name of phase B input signal of MR20.
41 Name_MR1C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR1.
42 Name_MR2C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR2.
43 Name_MR3C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR3.
44 Name_MR4C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR4.
45 Name_MR5C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR5.
46 Name_MR6C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR6.
47 Name_MR7C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR7.
48 Name_MR8C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR8.
49 Name_MR9C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR9.
50 Name_MR10C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR10.
51 Name_MR11C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR11.
7 Settings
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 7-11
Date: 2013-05-17
No. Symbol Range Description
52 Name_MR12C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR12.
53 Name_MR13C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR13.
54 Name_MR14C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR14.
55 Name_MR15C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR15.
56 Name_MR16C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR16.
57 Name_MR17C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR17.
58 Name_MR18C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR18.
59 Name_MR19C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR19.
60 Name_MR20C Maximum 16 characters Name of phase C input signal of MR20.
61 Name_Op_DlyMR1 Maximum 16 characters Name of operation message of MR1 with time delay
62 Name_Op_DlyMR2 Maximum 16 characters Name of operation message of MR2 with time delay
63 Name_Op_DlyMR3 Maximum 16 characters Name of operation message of MR3 with time delay
64 Name_Op_DlyMR4 Maximum 16 characters Name of operation message of MR4 with time delay
For example, Once “OilTemp_A” is defined for [Name_MR6A], when phase A of MR6 mechancial
protection operates with time delay, then binary input change report [BI_PhA_OilTemp] will be sent
to SAS or RTU. If the corresponding report is printed, then [BI_PhA_OilTemp] in report will replace
[BI_PhA_MR06].
Setting Path
Main Menu -> Settings -> Device Setup->Label Settings
7 Settings
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 7-12
Date: 2013-05-17
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-a Date: 2013-05-17
8 Human Machine Interface
Table of Contents
8.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 Keypad Operation ............................................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.2 LED Indications .................................................................................................................. 8-4
8.1.3 Front Communication Port .................................................................................................. 8-4
8.1.4 Ethernet Pot Setup ............................................................................................................. 8-5
8.2 Understand the HMI Menu Tree ...................................................................... 8-6
8.2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................. 8-6
8.2.2 Measurement ...................................................................................................................... 8-9
8.2.3 Status ................................................................................................................................ 8-10
8.2.4 Records ............................................................................................................................ 8-11
8.2.5 Settings ............................................................................................................................. 8-11
8.2.6 Print .................................................................................................................................. 8-12
8.2.7 Local Cmd ........................................................................................................................ 8-14
8.2.8 Information ........................................................................................................................ 8-14
8.2.9 Test ................................................................................................................................... 8-14
8.2.10 Clock ............................................................................................................................... 8-15
8.2.11 Language ........................................................................................................................ 8-15
8.3 Understand the LCD Display ........................................................................ 8-15
8.3.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................... 8-15
8.3.2 Display during Normal Operation ...................................................................................... 8-15
8.3.3 Display When Tripping ...................................................................................................... 8-16
8.3.4 Display under Abnormal Condition ................................................................................... 8-19
8.3.5 Display When Binary State Changes ................................................................................ 8-20
8.3.6 Display Device Logs ......................................................................................................... 8-22
8.4 Keypad Operation .......................................................................................... 8-23
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-b Date: 2013-05-17
8.4.1 View Device Analog .......................................................................................................... 8-23
8.4.2 View Device Status ........................................................................................................... 8-23
8.4.3 View Device Records ........................................................................................................ 8-23
8.4.4 Print Device Records ........................................................................................................ 8-24
8.4.5 View Device Setting .......................................................................................................... 8-25
8.4.6 Modify Device Setting ....................................................................................................... 8-25
8.4.7 Copy Device Setting ......................................................................................................... 8-28
8.4.8 Switch Setting Group ........................................................................................................ 8-29
8.4.9 Delete Records ................................................................................................................. 8-30
8.4.10 Modify Device Clock ....................................................................................................... 8-31
8.4.11 Check Software Version .................................................................................................. 8-32
8.4.12 View Module Information ................................................................................................ 8-32
8.4.13 Communication Test ....................................................................................................... 8-33
8.4.14 Select Language ............................................................................................................. 8-34
List of Figures
Figure 8.1-1 Front panel of PCS-974FG ................................................................................... 8-2
Figure 8.1-2 Keypad mounted on the front panel ................................................................... 8-3
Figure 8.1-3 the figure shows the LED indications ................................................................. 8-4
Figure 8.1-4 Corresponding cable of the RJ45 port in the front panel.................................. 8-5
Figure 8.1-5 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102C .................................................. 8-6
Figure 8.2-1 Tree diagram of total command menu ................................................................ 8-9
Figure 8.3-1 LCD display of single line diagram ................................................................... 8-16
Figure 8.3-2 LCD display 1 of trip report ............................................................................... 8-17
Figure 8.3-3 LCD display 2 of trip report and alarm report .................................................. 8-19
Figure 8.3-4 LCD display of alarm report ............................................................................... 8-19
Figure 8.3-5 Display of binary change report ........................................................................ 8-20
Figure 8.3-6 Display of device logs ........................................................................................ 8-22
Figure 8.4-1 Display of inputting password .......................................................................... 8-26
Figure 8.4-2 Display 1 of modifying settings ......................................................................... 8-27
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-c Date: 2013-05-17
Figure 8.4-3 Display 2 of modifying settings ......................................................................... 8-28
Figure 8.4-4 Display of copy settings .................................................................................... 8-29
Figure 8.4-5 Display of switching setting group ................................................................... 8-30
Figure 8.4-6 Display of deleting report .................................................................................. 8-31
Figure 8.4-7 Display of modifying clock ................................................................................ 8-32
Figure 8.4-8 Display of communication test .......................................................................... 8-33
Figure 8.4-9 Display of selecting language ........................................................................... 8-34
List of Tables
Table 8.1-1 Definition of the 8-core cable ................................................................................ 8-5
Table 8.2-1 Measurements of device ..................................................................................... 8-10
Table 8.3-1 Tripping report messages ................................................................................... 8-17
Table 8.3-2 Contact inputs list ................................................................................................ 8-20
Table 8.3-3 Mechanical signal inputs list............................................................................... 8-21
Table 8.3-4 Device logs list ..................................................................................................... 8-23
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-d Date: 2013-05-17
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-1 Date: 2013-05-17
The operator can access the protective device from the front panel. Local communication with the
protective device is possible using a computer via a multiplex RJ45 port on the front panel.
Furthermore, remote communication is also possible using a PC with the substation automation
system via rear RS485 port or rear Ethernet port. The operator is able to check the protective
device status at any time.
This chapter describes human machine interface (HMI), and give operator an instruction about
how to display or print event report, setting and so on through HMI menu tree and display metering
value, including RMS current, voltage and frequency etc. through LCD. Procedures to change
active setting group or a settable parameter value through keypad are also described in details.
NOTE!
About two measurement items in menu “Measurements”, please refer to the following
description:
“Measurement1” is used to display measured values for protection calculation.
“Measurement2” is used to display measured values for fault detector calculation.
8.1 Overview
The human-machine interface consists of a human-machine interface (HMI) module which allows
a communication to be as simple as possible for the user. The HMI module helps to draw your
attention to something that has occurred which may activate a LED or a report displayed on the
LCD. Operator can locate the data of interest by navigating the keypad.
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-2 Date: 2013-05-17
PCS-974
TRANSFORMER AUXILIARY RELAY
GR
P
ENT
ES
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
HEALTHY
ALARM
TRIP
2
1
3
4
5
Figure 8.1-1 Front panel of PCS-974FG
The function of HMI module:
No. Item Description
1 LCD
A 320×240 dot matrix backlight LCD display is visible in dim lighting
conditions. The corresponding messages are displayed when there is
operation implemented.
2 LED 20 status indication LEDs, first three LEDs are fixed as the signals of
“HEALTHY” , “ALARM” and “TRIP”, others are configurable.
3 Keypad Navigation keypad and command keys for full access to device
4 Communication port a multiplex RJ45 port for local communication with a PC
5 Logo Type and designation and manufacturer of device
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-3 Date: 2013-05-17
8.1.1 Keypad Operation
ENT
GR
P
-ES
C
+
Figure 8.1-2 Keypad mounted on the front panel
1. “ESC”:
Cancel the operation
Quit the current menu
2. “ENT”:
Execute the operation
Confirm the interface
3. “GRP”
Activate the switching interface of setting group
4. leftward and rightward direction keys (“◄” and “►”):
Move the cursor horizontally
Enter the next menu or return to the previous menu
5. upward and downward direction keys (“▲” and “▼”)
Move the cursor vertically
Select command menu within the same level of menu
6. plus and minus sign keys (“+” and “-”)
Modify the value
Modify and display the message number
Page up/down
NOTE!
Any setting change shall be confirmed by simply pressing “+”, “”, “”, “-“, “ENT” in
sequence.
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-4 Date: 2013-05-17
Any report deletion shall be executed by pressing “+”, “-“, “+”, “-“, “ENT” in sequence.
8.1.2 LED Indications
HEALTHY
ALARM
TRIP
Figure 8.1-3 the figure shows the LED indications
A brief explanation has been made as bellow.
LED Display Description
HEALTHY
Off When the equipment is out of service or any hardware error is
detected during self-check.
Green Lit when the equipment is in service and ready for operation.
ALARM
Off When equipment in normal operating condition.
Yellow Lit when VT circuit failure, CT circuit failure or other abnormal alarm
is issued.
TRIP
Off when the equipment is in normal operating condition
Red Lit when any protection element trips.
NOTE!
The LED “HEALTHY” can only be lit by supplying DC to equipment without alarms
blocking equipment.
The LED “ALARM” can be lit when there is some abnormality such as CT circuit
abnormality, pickup of breaker failure initiation, and when equipment returns to
normal operating state, the LED can go off automatically. Mechanical protection
which is not controlled by DSP module operates with only “ALARM” LED being lit.
The “TRIP” LED is turned on and latched once any protection element controlled by
DSP module of device operates and. The “TRIP” LED can be turned off by pressing
the signal RESET button on the front panel.
8.1.3 Front Communication Port
There is a multiplex RJ45 port on the front panel. This port can be used as an RS-232 serial port
as well as a twisted-pair Ethernet port. As shown in the following figure, a customized cable is
applied for debugging via this multiplex RJ45 port.
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-5 Date: 2013-05-17
Figure 8.1-4 Corresponding cable of the RJ45 port in the front panel
In the above figure and the following table:
P1: To connect the multiplex RJ45 port. An 8-core cable is applied here.
P2: To connect the twisted-pair Ethernet port of the computer.
P3: To connect the RS-232 serial port of the computer.
The definition of the 8-core cable in the above figure is introduced in the following table.
Table 8.1-1 Definition of the 8-core cable
Pin No. Core color Function Device side
(Left)
Computer side
(Right)
1 Orange TX+ of the Ethernet port P1-1 P2-1
2 Orange & white TX- of the Ethernet port P1-2 P2-2
3 Green & white RX+ of the Ethernet port P1-3 P2-3
4 Blue TXD of the RS-232 serial port P1-4 P3-2
5 Brown & white RXD of the RS-232 serial port P1-5 P3-3
6 Green RX- for the Ethernet port P1-6 P2-6
7 Blue & white The ground connection of the RS-232 port. P1-7 P3-5
8.1.4 Ethernet Pot Setup
MON plug-in module is equipped with two or four 100Base-TX Ethernet interface, take NR1102C
as an example, as shown in Figure 8.1-5.
The Ethernet port can be used to communication with PC via auxiliary software (PCS-Explorer)
after connecting the protection device with PC, so as to fulfill on-line function (please refer to the
instruction manual of PCS-Explorer). At first, the connection between the protection device and PC
must be established. Through setting the IP address and subnet mask of corresponding Ethernet
interface in the menu “Settings→Device Setup→Communication Settings”, it should be
ensured that the protection device and PC are in the same network segment. For example, setting
the IP address and subnet mask of network A. (using network A to connect with PC)
PC: IP address is set as “198.87.96.102”, subnet mask is set as “255.255.255.0”
The IP address and subnet mask of protection device should be [IP_LAN1]= 198.87.96.XXX,
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-6 Date: 2013-05-17
[Mask_LAN1]=255.255.255.0, [En_LAN1]=1. (XXX can be any value from 0 to 255 except 102)
If the logic setting [En_LAN1] is non-available, it means that network A is always enabled.
NR1102C
ETHERNET
Network A
Network B
SYN+
SYN-
SGND
RTS
TXD
SGND
Figure 8.1-5 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102C
NOTE! If using other Ethernet port, for example, Ethernet B, the logic setting [En_LAN2]
must be set as “1”.
8.2 Understand the HMI Menu Tree
8.2.1 Overview
Press “▲” of any running interface and enter the main menu. Select different submenu by “▲” and
“▼”. Enter the selected submenu by pressing “ENT” or “►”. Press “◄” and return to the previous
menu. Press “ESC” and exit the main menu directly. For sake of executing the command menu
again, one command menu will be recorded in the quick menu after its first execution. Five latest
menu commands can be recorded in the quick menu. When the five menu commands are
recorded, the latest menu command will cover the earliest one, adopting the “first in first out”
principle. It is arranged from top to bottom and in accordance with the execution order of command
menus. Press “▲” to enter the main menu with the interface as shown in the following diagram:
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-7 Date: 2013-05-17
Quick Menu
Language
Reset Target
Device Settings
Mainmenu
For the first powered protective device, there is no recorded shortcut menu. Press “▲” to enter the
main menu with the interface as shown in the following diagram:
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-8 Date: 2013-05-17
Test
Local Cmd
Settings
Records
Measurements
Status
Information
Clock
Language
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-9 Date: 2013-05-17
MAIN MENU
Device Test
Internal Signal
Measurements
Measurements 1
Status
Primary Values
Inputs
Local Cmd
Reset Target
Trig Oscillograph
Download
Contact Inputs
Superv State
Information
Version Info
Board Info
Clock
Test
Measurements 2
Protection Elements
Superv Events
IO EventsRecords
Disturb Records
Superv Events
IO Events
Device Logs
Clear Records
Settings
Device Info
Prot Settings
Prot Settings
System Settings
Latest Chgd Settings
All Settings
Function Links
Logic Links
Device Setup
Device Settings
Communication Settings
Label Settings
LanguageSettings
Prot Settings
Prot Settings
System Settings
Primary Values
Prot Superv
FD Superv
Function Links
Logic Links
Device Setup
Device Settings
Communication Settings
Label Settings
Copy Settings
Waveforms
IEC103 Info
Rec Wave
Disturb Records
Superv Events
IO Events
Device Status
Cancle Print
Device Logs
Figure 8.2-1 Tree diagram of total command menu
Under the main interface, press “▲” to enter the main menu, and select submenu by pressing “▲”,
“▼” and “ENT”. The command menu adopts a tree shaped content structure. The above diagram
provides the integral structure and all the submenus under menu tree of the protection device.
NOTE! The menu shown in above figure is not the specific-application menu. For each
project, the menu varies with the protection configuration.
8.2.2 Measurement
This menu is mainly used to display the real time sampling value of current, voltage and phase
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-10 Date: 2013-05-17
angle. This menu and “Status” menu can fully reflects of the running environment of the protection
device. As long as the displayed values consist with the actual running situation, basically, the
protection device can work normally. This menu is set to greatly facilitate the debugging and
maintenance of people on site.
The menu “Measurements” has following submenus.
No. Item Description
1 Measurement 1 Display sampled and calculated values for protection calculation.
2 Measurement 2 Display sampled and calculated values for fault detector calculation.
8.2.2.1 Measurements1
The menu “Measurement1” has following submenus.
No. Item Description
1 Primary Values Display measured values and phase angles for protection calculation.
8.2.2.2 Measurements2
The menu “Measurements2” has following lower submenus.
No. Item Description
1 Primary values Display measured values and phase angles for fault detector
calculation.
Measurement values are listed in the following table.
Table 8.2-1 Measurements of device
No. Symbol Definition Unit
1 Ia The phase A current. A
2 Ib The phase B current. A
3 Ic The phase C current. A
4 3I0Cal The calculated residual current. A
5 I1 The positive-sequence current. A
6 I2 The negative-sequence current. A
7 Ang(Ia-Ib) The angle between phase A and phase B currents. °
8 Ang(Ib-Ic) The angle between phase B and phase C currents. °
9 Ang(Ic-Ia) The angle between phase C and phase A currents. °
8.2.3 Status
This menu is mainly used to display the state of binary inputs (including binary inputs via
opto-coupler and GOOSE binary inputs) and alarm signals in the protection device. This menu and
“Measurements” menu fully reflects the running environment of the protection device. As long as
the displayed values consist with the actual running situation, basically, the protection device can
work normally. This menu is set to greatly facilitate the debugging and maintenance of people on
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-11 Date: 2013-05-17
site.
The menu “Status” has following submenus.
No. Item Description
1 Inputs Display all input signal states.
2 Outputs Display all output signal states.
3 Superv State Display supervision alarm states.
8.2.3.1 Inputs
The menu “Inputs” has following submenus.
No. Item Description
1 Contact Inputs Display states of binary input derived from opto-isolated channels
8.2.3.2 Outputs
The menu “Outputs” has following submenus.
No. Item Description
1 Contact Outputs Display states of binary output derived from opto-isolated channels
8.2.4 Records
This menu is used for displaying all kinds of records, so that the operator can load to view and use
as the reference of analyzing accidents and maintaining the device. All the records are stored in
non-volatile memory, and it can still record the reports even if it loses its power.
This menu includes the following command menus.
No. Item Function description
1 Disturb Records Display trip records.
2 Superv Events Display self-check alarm and equipment operation abnormal alarm
reports.
3 IO Events Display binary events.
4 Device Logs Display running and operation reports of protective device.
5 Clear Records Clear all records.
8.2.5 Settings
This menu is used for checking the setting of device equipment parameter, protection setting, logic
setting and system parameter, as well as modifying any of the above setting items. Moreover, it
can also execute the setting copy between different setting groups.
This menu includes the following command menus.
No. Item Function description
1 System Settings To display and modify the system settings.
2 Prot Settings To display and modify the protection settings
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-12 Date: 2013-05-17
No. Item Function description
3 Logic Links To display and modify the logic links.
4 Device Setup To display and modify the settings related to device setup.
5 Copy Settings To copy settings from one group to another group.
8.2.5.1 Prot Settings
The submenu “Prot Settings” includes the following command menus.
No. Item Function description
1 Prot Settings To display and modify all protection settings of device.
8.2.5.2 Logic Links
The submenu “Logic Links” includes the following command menus.
No. Item Function description
1 Function Links To display and modify the function logic links of protection element.
8.2.5.3 Device Setup
The menu “Device Setup” has following submenus.
No. Item Function description
1 Device Settings To display and modify the device settings.
2 Communication Settings To display and modify the communication settings.
3 Label Settings To display and modify the label settings of protective device.
8.2.6 Print
This menu is used for printing device description, setting, all kinds of records, waveform and
information related with 103 Protocol.
This menu includes the following command menus and submenus.
No. Item Function description
1 Device Info To print the description information of protective device including
software version.
2 Settings
To print settings, including communication parameter, protection
setting, logic links and device setup. It can print by different
classifications as well as printing all settings of the device. Besides, it
can also print out the latest modified setting item.
3 Disturb Records To print trip reports.
4 Superv Events To print status change of binary signal.
5 IO Events To print self-check alarm and equipment operation abnormal alarm
reports.
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-13 Date: 2013-05-17
No. Item Function description
6 Device Logs To print running and operation reports of protective device.
7 Device Status To print present status of device, including measurement, signal
status, settings, etc.
8 Waveforms To print recorded waveforms.
9 IEC103 Info
To print 103 protocol information, including function type (FUN),
information serial number (INF), general classification service group
number and channel number (ACC).
8.2.6.1 Settings
The menu “Settings” has following submenus.
No. Item Function description
1 System Settings To print the system settings.
2 Prot Settings To print the protection settings
3 Logic Links To print the logic links.
4 Device Setup To print the settings related to device setup.
5 All Settings To print all settings.
6 Latest Modified To print latest modified settings.
(1) The submenu “Prot Settings” includes the following command menus.
No. Item Function description
1 Prot Settings To print all protection settings of device.
(2) The submenu “Logic Links” includes the following command menus.
No. Item Function description
1 Function Links To print the function logic links of protection element.
(3) The menu “Device Setup” has following submenus.
No. Item Function description
1 Device Settings To print the equipment settings including GOOSE module settings.
2 Communication Settings To print the communication settings.
3 Label Settings To print label settings of protective device.
8.2.6.2 Waveforms
The submenu “Waveforms” has following submenus.
No. Item Description
1 Rec Wave To print current waveforms.
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-14 Date: 2013-05-17
8.2.7 Local Cmd
This menu is used for resetting the tripping relay with latch, protection device signal lamp, LCD
display, as the same as the resetting function of binary input. Record the currently acquired
waveform data of the protection device under normal condition for printing and uploading SAS.
Besides, it can send out the request of program download.
This menu includes the following command menus.
No. Item Function description
1 Reset Target Reset the local signal, the signal indicator lamp and the LCD display.
2 Trig Oscillograph Trigger waveform recording.
3 Download Send out the download request.
8.2.8 Information
In this menu the LCD displays software information of DSP module, MON module and HMI module,
which consists of version, creating time of software, CRC codes and management sequence
number. Besides, hardware board information can also be viewed.
This menu includes the following command menus.
No. Item Function description
1 Version Info Display software version information of the equipment.
2 Board Info Monitor the current working state of each board of the equipment
8.2.9 Test
This menu is mainly used for developers to debug the program and for engineers to maintain
device. It can be used to check module information and item fault message, and fulfill the
communication test function. It’s also used to generate all kinds of report or event to transmit to the
SAS without any external input, so as to debug the communication on site.
This menu includes the following command menus.
No. Item Function description
1 Device Test Execute device tests.
2 Internal Signal Display internal signals of device.
The submenu “Device Test” has following submenus. Users can respectively execute the test
automatically or manually by selecting commands “All Test” or “Select Test”.
No. Item Function description
3 Protection Elements Generate messages of protection element to transmit to SCADA.
4 Superv Events Generate alarm messages to transmit to SCADA.
5 IO Events Generate binary events to transmit to SCADA.
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-15 Date: 2013-05-17
8.2.10 Clock
The current time of internal clock can be viewed here. The time is displayed in the form
YY-MM-DD and hh:mm:ss. All values are presented with digits and can be modified.
8.2.11 Language
This menu is mainly used to set LCD display language.
8.3 Understand the LCD Display
8.3.1 Overview
There are five kinds of LCD display, SLD (single line diagram) display, tripping reports, alarm
reports, binary input changing reports and control reports. Tripping reports and alarm reports will
not disappear until these reports are acknowledged by pressing the RESET button in the
protection panel (i.e. energizing the binary input [BI_RstTarg]). User can press both “ENT” and
“ESC” at the same time to switch the display among trip reports, alarm reports and the SLD display.
Binary change reports will be displayed for 5s and then it’ll return to the previous display interface
automatically. Control reports will not pop up and can only be viewed by navigating the
corresponding menu.
8.3.2 Display during Normal Operation
After the protection device is powered and turns into the initiating interface, it takes 30 seconds to
complete the initialization of protection device. During the initialization of protection device, the
“HEALTHY” indicator of the protection device goes out.
Under normal condition, the LCD will display the following interface. The LCD adopts white color
as its backlight that is activated if once there is any keyboard operation, and is extinguished
automatically after 60 seconds of no operation.
When the equipment is powered on, based on actual connection of the transformer, the LCD will
display single line diagram on its connection diagrams. If the transformer has three windings and 2
branches on LV side, the LCD will display by configuring the logic settings.
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-16 Date: 2013-05-17
Communication address
Current values
Mechanical signal state
Active group numberAddr:102
Data and time of equipment clock
2011-07-09 10:27:24 Group 01
Ia: 1.000A Ib: 1.000A Ic: 1.000A
MR_A1
MR_A2
: 0
: 0
MR_A3 : 0
MR_A4 : 0
MR_A5
MR_A6
: 0
: 0
MR_A7 : 0
MR_A8 : 0
MR Input Signal A
MR_A9 : 0
MR_A10 : 0
MR_A11
MR_A12
: 0
: 0
MR_A13 : 0
MR_A14 : 0
MR_A15
MR_A16
: 0
: 0
MR_A17 : 0
MR_A18 : 0
MR_A19 : 0
MR_A20 : 0
Figure 8.3-1 LCD display of single line diagram
The displayed content of the interface contains: the current date and time of the protection device
(with a format of yy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss:), the currently valid setting group number, the three-phase
current and voltage sampled values of each side, differential current, residual differential current,
frequency etc.
8.3.3 Display When Tripping
This protection device can store 64 fault reports and 64 fault waveforms. When there is protection
element operating, the LCD will automatically display the latest fault report, and two kinds of LCD
display will be available depending on whether there is self-check report at present.
If the device has no self-check report, the display interface will only show the fault report.
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-17 Date: 2013-05-17
. Distub Records NO.2
2011-11-28 07:10:00:200
24000ms 62PD.Op_t1
00000ms TrigDFR
Figure 8.3-2 LCD display 1 of trip report
Disturb Records NO.2 shows the title and SOE number of the report.
2011-11-28 07:10:00:200 shows the time when fault detector picks up, the format is
year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond.
0000ms TrigDFR shows fault detector of protection element and operation time of fault
detector is fixed as 0ms.
2400ms 62PD.Op_t1 shows the relative operation time and operation element of protection
element
Operation report messages are all liseted showed in the following table.
Table 8.3-1 Tripping report messages
No. Message Description
1 ManTrigDFR Oscillography function is triggered manually.
2 RmtTrigDFR Oscillography function is triggered remotely.
3 TrigDFR Fault detector operates to trigger oscillography.
4 ProtBrd.AlmTrigDFR Oscillography function is triggered by alarm signals on
protection board.
5 ProtBrd.FailTrigDFR Oscillography function is triggered by failure signals on
protection board.
6 62PD.Op_t1 Delay 1 of pole disagreement protection operates
7 62PD.Op_t2 Delay 2 of pole disagreement protection operates
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-18 Date: 2013-05-17
No. Message Description
8 62PD.TrigDFR_t1 Delay 1 of pole disagreement protection picks up to trigger
trigger FDR function.
9 62PD.TrigDFR_t2 Delay 2 of pole disagreement protection picks up to trigger
trigger FDR function.
10 50BF.Op_t1 Delay 1 of breaker failure initation operates.
11 50BF.Op_t2 Delay 2 of breaker failure initiation operates.
12 Op_DlyMR1 MR1 mechanical protection operates with time delay.
13 Op_DlyMR2 MR2 mechanical protection operates with time delay.
14 Op_DlyMR3 MR3 mechanical protection operates with time delay.
15 Op_DlyMR4 MR4 mechanical protection operates with time delay.
16 TrpOut_62PD_t1 Tripping output of delay 1 of pole disagreement protection
operation.
17 TrpOut_62PD_t2 Tripping output of delay 2 of pole disagreement protection
operation.
18 TrpOut_50BF_t1 Tripping output of delay 1 of breaker failure initiation operation.
19 TrpOut_50BF_t1 Tripping output of delay 2 of breaker failure initiation operation.
20 Trpout_DlyMR1 Tripping output os MR1 mechanical protection operation.
21 Trpout_DlyMR2 Tripping output os MR2 mechanical protection operation.
22 Trpout_DlyMR3 Tripping output os MR3 mechanical protection operation.
23 Trpout_DlyMR4 Tripping output os MR4 mechanical protection operation.
For the situation that the fault report and the self-check alarm report occur simultaneously in the
following figure, the upper half part is fault report, and the lower half part is self-check report. As to
the upper half part, it displays separately the record number of fault report, fault name, generating
time of fault report (with a format of yy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss:), protection element and tripping element.
If there is protection element, there is relative time on the basis of fault detector element and fault
phase. At the same time, if the total lines of protection element and tripping element are more than
3, a scroll bar will appear at the right. The height of the black part of the scroll bar basically
indicates the total lines of protection element and tripping element, and its position suggests the
position of the currently displayed line in the total lines. The scroll bar of protection element and
tripping element will roll up at the speed of one line per time. When it rolls to the last three lines, it’ll
roll from the earliest protection element and tripping element again. The displayed content of the
lower half part is similar to that of the upper half part.
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-19 Date: 2013-05-17
Alm_OptoDC
NO.010 2011-11-28 10:10:00 Trip
Alarm Infor
24000ms 62PD.Op_t1
00000ms TrigDFR
Figure 8.3-3 LCD display 2 of trip report and alarm report
8.3.4 Display under Abnormal Condition
This protection device can store 1024 self-check reports. During the running of protection device,
the self-check report of hardware errors or system running abnormity will be displayed
immediately.
Superv Events NO.4
2008-12-29 9:18:47:500ms
Alm_OptoDC 0 1
Figure 8.3-4 LCD display of alarm report
Superv Events NO.4 shows the SOE number and title of the report
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-20 Date: 2013-05-17
2011-11-28 09:18:47:500 shows the data and time of the report occurred: year–month-date
and hour:minute:second:millisecond
Alm_OptoDC 0->1 shows the content of abnormality alarm
All the alarm elements have been listed in Chapter “Supervision”.
8.3.5 Display When Binary State Changes
When a binary input is energized or de-energized, output contacts operate, the corresponding IO
event report will be automatically displayed on LCD as follows. This protective equipment can
store 1024 events of binary signals. During the running of the equipment, the binary signals will be
displayed once the input signal state changes.
IO_Events NO.4
2008-11-29 09:18:47:500ms
BI_RstTarg 0 1
Figure 8.3-5 Display of binary change report
No.004 Binary Events shows the number and title of the report
2008-11-28 09:18:47:500 shows the date and time of the report occurred, the format is
year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond
BI_RstTarg 0->1 shows the state change of binary input, including binary input
name, original state and final state
Contact inputs and contact outputs are listed in the following two tables, and user can define
undefined binary inputs as the specific binary inputs via PCS-Explorer software.
Table 8.3-2 Contact inputs list
No. Binary input Description
1 BI_TimeSyn Binary input of time synchronization pulse
2 BI_Print Binary input of triggering printing
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-21 Date: 2013-05-17
No. Binary input Description
3 BI_Maintenance Binary input of indicating the protection device is under maintenance state
4 BI_RstTarg Binary input of resetting signal of protective equipment
5 BI_En62PD Binary input of enabling pole disagreement protection
6 BI_En50BF Binary input of enabling breaker failure initiation
7 BI_EnDlyMR Binary input of enabling MR protection with time delay
8 BI_EnRmtCtrl Binary input of enabling remote control function
9 BI_09 Configurable binary input 09, not used
10 BI_10 Configurable binary input 10, not used
11 BI_11 Configurable binary input 11, not used
12 BI_12 Configurable binary input 12, not used
13 BI_13 Configurable binary input 13, not used
14 BI_14 Configurable binary input 14, not used
15 BI_15 Configurable binary input 15, not used
16 BI_16 Configurable binary input 16, not used
17 BI_17 Configurable binary input 17, not used
18 BI_18 Configurable binary input 18, not used
19 BI_16 Configurable binary input 19, not used
20 BI_20 Configurable binary input 20, not used
21 BI_21 Configurable binary input 20, not used
22 BI_ExTCtrlPD2 Binary input of tripping signal for controlling delay 2 of pole disagreement
23 BI_ExTCtrlBFI Binary input of tripping signal for controlling breaker failure initiation
24 BI_52a Binary input of auxiliary NO contact of circuit breaker
25 BI_PD Binary input of pole disagreement of circuit breaker
Table 8.3-3 Mechanical signal inputs list
No. Binary input Description
1 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR01 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR1 mechanical relay.
2 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR02 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR2 mechanical relay.
3 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR03 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR3 mechanical relay.
4 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR04 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR4 mechanical relay.
5 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR05 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR5 mechanical relay.
6 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR06 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR6 mechanical relay.
7 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR07 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR7 mechanical relay.
8 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR08 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR8 mechanical relay.
9 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR09 Phase A (B,C)input signal of MR9 mechanical relay.
10 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR10 Phase A (B,C)input signal of MR10 mechanical relay.
11 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR11 Phase A (B,C)input signal of MR11 mechanical relay.
12 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR12 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR12 mechanical relay.
13 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR13 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR13 mechanical relay.
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-22 Date: 2013-05-17
No. Binary input Description
14 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR14 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR14 mechanical relay.
15 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR15 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR15 mechanical relay.
16 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR16 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR16 mechanical relay.
17 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR17 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR17 mechanical relay.
18 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR18 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR18 mechanical relay.
19 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR19 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR19 mechanical relay.
20 BI_PhA(B,C)_MR20 Phase A (B,C) input signal of MR20 mechanical relay.
NOTE! Names of above mechanical input signals can be defined by users via setting
[Name_MRxx] in the menu “Settings->Device Settings->Label Settings”.
8.3.6 Display Device Logs
This protection device can store 1024 pieces of equipment logs. During the running of the
protection device, equipment logs will be displayed after user operations.
Device Logs NO.4
Device_Reboot
2011-11-28 10:18:47:569ms
Figure 8.3-6 Display of device logs
Device Logs NO. 4 shows the title and the number of the report
2011-11-28 10:18:47:569 shows the date and time when the report occurred, the format is
year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond
Device_Reboot shows the state content of the user operation report.
User operating information listed below may be displayed.
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-23 Date: 2013-05-17
Table 8.3-4 Device logs list
No. Message Description
1 Device_Reboot The protective equipment has been rebooted.
2 Settings_Chgd The settings of protective equipment have been changed.
3 ActiveGrp_Chgd Active setting group has been changed.
4 Report_Cleared All reports have been deleted. (Device log events can not be deleted.)
5 Waveform_Cleared All waveforms have been deleted.
6 SubProcess_Exit A subprocess has exited.
8.4 Keypad Operation
8.4.1 View Device Analog
The operation is as follows:
1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Measurements” menu, and then
press the “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu item, and then press
the key “ENT” to enter the submenu.
4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one
display screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most).
5. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu.
6. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Measurements” menu).
8.4.2 View Device Status
The operation is as follows:
1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Status” menu, and then press the
“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu item, and then press
the key “ENT” to enter the submenu.
4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one
display screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most).
5. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu.
6. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Status” menu).
8.4.3 View Device Records
The operation is as follows:
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-24 Date: 2013-05-17
1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Records” menu, and then press the
key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
key “ENT” to enter the submenu.
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to page up/down.
5. Press the key “+” or “-” to select pervious or next record.
6. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu.
7. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Records” menu).
8.4.4 Print Device Records
The operation is as follows:
1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Print” menu, and then press the
“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
“ENT” to enter the menu.
Selecting the “Disturb Records”, and then
Press the “+” or “-” to select pervious or next record. After pressing the key “ENT”,
the LCD will display “Start Printing... ”, and then automatically exit this menu
(returning to the menu “Print”). If the printer doesn’t complete its current print task
and re-start it for printing, and the LCD will display “Printer Busy…”. Press the key
“ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Print”).
Selecting the command menu “Superv Events” or “IO Events”, and then press the
key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor. Press the “+” or “-” to select the starting and
ending numbers of printing message. After pressing the key “ENT”, the LCD will
display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the
menu “Print”). Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Print”).
4. If selecting the command menu “Device Info”, “Status“ or “IEC103 Info”, press the key
“ENT”, the LCD will display “Start printing..”, and then automatically exit this menu
(returning to the menu “Print”).
5. If selecting the “Settings”, “Logic Links”, press the key “ENT” or “►” to enter the next
level of menu.
6. After entering the submenu “Settings”, press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor, and
then press the key “ENT” to print the corresponding default value. If selecting any item to
printing:
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-25 Date: 2013-05-17
Press the key “+” or “-” to select the setting group to be printed. After pressing the key
“ENT”, the LCD will display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu
(returning to the menu “Settings”). Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the
menu “Settings”).
7. After entering the submenu “Waveforms”, press the “+” or “-” to select the waveform
item to be printed and press “ENT” to enter. If there is no any waveform data, the LCD will
display “No Waveform Data!” (Before executing the command menu “HVS Wave”, it is
necessary to execute the command menu “Trig Oscillograph” in the menu “Local Cmd”,
otherwise the LCD will display “No Waveform Data!”). With waveform data existing:
Press the key “+” or “-” to select pervious or next record. After pressing the key “ENT”,
the LCD will display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to
the menu “Waveforms”). If the printer does not complete its current print task and
re-start it for printing, and the LCD will display “Printer Busy…”. Press the key “ESC” to
exit this menu (returning to the menu “Waveforms”).
8.4.5 View Device Setting
The operation is as follows:
1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Settings” menu, and then press the
key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
key “ENT” to enter the menu.
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor.
5. Press the key “+” or “-” to page up/down.
6. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu.
7. Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Settings”).
NOTE! If the displayed information exceeds 14 lines, the scroll bar will appear on the right
side of the LCD to indicate the quantity of all displayed information of the command menu
and the relative location of information where the current cursor points at.
8.4.6 Modify Device Setting
The operation is as follows:
1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Settings” menu, and then press
the key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press
the key “ENT” to enter the menu.
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-26 Date: 2013-05-17
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor.
5. Press the key “+” or “-” to page up/down.
6. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu.
7. Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Settings” ).
8. If selecting the command menu “Device Settings” or “Communication Settings”,
move the cursor to the setting item to be modified, and then press the key “ENT”.
Press the key “+” or “-” to modify the value (if the modified value is of multi-bit, press
the key “◄” or “►” to move the cursor to the digit bit, and then press the “+” or “-” to
modify the value), press the key “ESC” to cancel the modification and return to the
displayed interface of the command menu “Device Settings”. Press the key “ENT” to
automatically exit this menu (returning to the displayed interface of the command menu
“Device Settings”).
Move the cursor to continue modifying other setting items. After all setting values are
modified, press the key “◄”, “►” or “ESC”, and the LCD will display “Save or Not?”.
Directly press the “ESC” or press the key “◄” or “►” to move the cursor. Select the
“Cancel”, and then press the key “ENT” to automatically exit this menu (returning to the
displayed interface of the command menu “Device Settings”).
Press the key “◄” or “►” to move the cursor. Select “No” and press the key “ENT”, all
modified setting item will restore to its original value, exit this menu (returning to the
menu “Settings”).
Press the key “◄” or “►” to move the cursor to select “Yes”, and then press the key
“ENT”, the LCD will display password input interface.
Please Input Password:
----
Figure 8.4-1 Display of inputting password
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-27 Date: 2013-05-17
Input a 4-bit password (“+”, “◄”, “▲” or “-”). If the password is incorrect, continue
inputting it, and then press the “ESC” to exit the password input interface and return to
the displayed interface of the command menu “Device Settings”. If the password is
correct, LCD will display “Save Settings…”, and then exit this menu (returning to the
displayed interface of the command menu “Device Settings”), with all modified setting
items as modified values.
NOTE! For different setting items, their displayed interfaces are different but their
modification methods are the same.
NOTE! After modifying the parameter settings of equipment i.e. settings in menu “Device
Settings” or “Communication Settings”, the “HEALTHY” indicator of the protection
device will go out, and the protection device will automatically restart and re-check the
protection setting. If the check doesn’t pass, the protection device will be blocked.
9. If selecting the command menu of protection element or tripping matrix such as “Prot
Settings”, the LCD will display the following interface:
1. 62PD.3I0_Set
Group NO select
Group NO To be edited 02
Current Group NO: 01
Figure 8.4-2 Display 1 of modifying settings
Then move the cursor to the modified value and press “ENT” to enter. If the setting
[87.I_Biased] is selected to modify, then press the “ENT” to enter and the LCD will display
the following interface. is shown the “+” or “-” to modify the value and then press the
“ENT” to enter.
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-28 Date: 2013-05-17
62PD.3I0_Set
Modified Value
Current Value
Min Value
8.000
0.040
Max Value 150
8.000
Figure 8.4-3 Display 2 of modifying settings
10. If selecting the other menus, move the cursor to the setting to be modified, and then
press the “ENT”.
8.4.7 Copy Device Setting
The operation is as follows:
1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu;
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Settings” menu, and then press the
key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu;
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Copy Settings”,
and then press the key “ENT” to enter the menu. The following display will be shown on
LCD.
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-29 Date: 2013-05-17
Copy Settings
Active Group: 01
Copy To Group: 02
Figure 8.4-4 Display of copy settings
Press the key “+” or “-” to modify the value. Press the key “ESC”, and return to the
menu “Settings”. Press the “ENT”, the LCD will display the interface for password input,
if the password is incorrect, continue inputting it, press the key “ESC” to exit the
password input interface and return to the menu “Settings”. If the password is correct,
the LCD will display “Copy Settings Success!”, and exit this menu (returning to the menu
“Settings”).
8.4.8 Switch Setting Group
The operation is as follows:
1. Exit the main menu.
2. Press the “GRP”.
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-30 Date: 2013-05-17
Change Active Group
Active Group: 01
Change To Group: 02
Figure 8.4-5 Display of switching setting group
Press the “+” or “-” to modify the value, and then press the key “ESC” to exit this menu
(returning to the main menu). After pressing the key “ENT”, the LCD will display the password
input interface. If the password is incorrect, continue inputting it, and then press the key “ESC” to
exit the password input interface and return to its original state. If the password is correct, the
“HEALTHY” indicator of the protection device will go out, and the protection device will re-check
the protection setting. If the check doesn’t pass, the protection device will be blocked. If the check
is successful, the LCD will return to its original state.
8.4.9 Delete Records
The operation is as follows:
1. Exit the main menu.
2. Press the “+”, “-”, “+”, “-” and key “ENT”; Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu
(returning to the original state). Press the key “ENT” to carry out the deletion.
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-31 Date: 2013-05-17
Press <ENT> To Clear
Press <ESC> To Exit
Figure 8.4-6 Display of deleting report
NOTE! The operation of deleting device records will delete all messages saved by the
protection device, including disturbance records, supervision events and binary events,
but the user operation reports (i.e. equipment logs) can not be deleted. Furthermore, all
deleted records are irrecoverable after deletion, so the function shall be used with great
cautious.
8.4.10 Modify Device Clock
The operation is as follows:
1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Clock” menu, and then press the key
“ENT” to enter clock display.
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-32 Date: 2013-05-17
Clock
Month
Year
Day
11
2008
28
Hour 20
Minute
Second
59
14
Figure 8.4-7 Display of modifying clock
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the date or time to be modified.
4. Press the key “+” or “-”, to modify value, and then press the key “ENT” to save the
modification and return to the main menu.
5. Press the key “ESC” to cancel the modification and return to the main menu.
8.4.11 Check Software Version
The operation is as follows:
1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Information” menu, and then press
the “ENT” to enter the menu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Version Info”, and
then press the key “ENT” to display the software version.
4. Press the key “ESC” to return to the main menu.
8.4.12 View Module Information
The operation is as follows:
1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Information” menu, and then press
the key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Board Info”, and
then press the “ENT” to enter the menu.
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the scroll bar.
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-33 Date: 2013-05-17
5. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Information” menu).
8.4.13 Communication Test
The operation is as follows:
1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Test” menu, and then press the key
“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Comm Test”, and
then press the key “ENT” to enter the menu, to select test item. If “Prot Elements”
“Superv Events” or “IO Events” is selected, the LCD will display “Entering
Communication Test…”.
Operation Eelment
Select Test
All Test
Figure 8.4-8 Display of communication test
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to select the corresponding command menu
“All Test” or “Select Test”. If selecting the “All Test”, press the “ENT”, and the device will
successively carry out all operation element message test one by one.
5. If selecting the “Select Test”, users will go to an interface, then select the “+” or “-” to
page up/down to select each operation element and press the key “ENT” to execute the
test.
NOTE! If no input operation is carried out within 60s, exit the communication transmission
and return to the “Test” menu, at this moment, the LCD will display “Communication Test
Timeout and Exiting...”.
6. Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Test”, at this moment, the
LCD will display “Communication Test Exiting…”.
8 Human Machine Interface
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 8-34 Date: 2013-05-17
8.4.14 Select Language
The operation is as follows:
1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Language”, and
then press the key “ENT” to enter the menu and the following display will be shown on
LCD.
Please Select Language:
English
中文1
2
Figure 8.4-9 Display of selecting language
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the language user preferred and press
the key “ENT” to execute language switching. After language switching is finished, LCD
will return to the menu “Language”, and the display language is changed. Otherwise,
press the key “ESC” to cancel language switching and return to the menu “Language”.
NOTE! The LCD interface provided in this chapter is only a reference and available for
explaining specific definition of LCD. The displayed interface of the actual protection
device may be some different from it, so you shall be subject to the actual protection
device.
9 Communication
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-a Date: 2013-05-17
9 Communication
Table of Contents
9.1 General Description......................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 Rear Communication Port Information .......................................................... 9-1
9.2.1 RS-485 Interface ................................................................................................................ 9-1
9.2.2 Ethernet Interface ............................................................................................................... 9-3
9.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication ....................................................................................... 9-4
9.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port ..................................................... 9-4
9.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer ................................................................................... 9-5
9.3.2 Initialization ......................................................................................................................... 9-5
9.3.3 Time Synchronization ......................................................................................................... 9-5
9.3.4 Spontaneous Events ........................................................................................................... 9-5
9.3.5 General Interrogation .......................................................................................................... 9-6
9.3.6 General Functions .............................................................................................................. 9-6
9.3.7 Disturbance Records .......................................................................................................... 9-7
9.4 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Ethernet ........................................................ 9-7
9.5 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol ............................................... 9-7
9.5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................. 9-7
9.5.2 Communication Profiles ...................................................................................................... 9-8
9.5.3 Server Data Organization ................................................................................................... 9-9
9.5.4 Server Features and Configuration ................................................................................... 9-11
9.5.5 ACSI conformance ............................................................................................................ 9-12
9.5.6 Logical Nodes ................................................................................................................... 9-17
9.6 DNP3.0 Interface ............................................................................................ 9-20
9.6.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................... 9-20
9.6.2 Link Layer Functions......................................................................................................... 9-20
9.6.3 Transport Functions .......................................................................................................... 9-20
9 Communication
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-b Date: 2013-05-17
9.6.4 Application Layer Functions .............................................................................................. 9-20
List of Figures
Figure 9.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements ........................................................ 9-2
Figure 9.2-2 Ethernet communication cable ........................................................................... 9-3
Figure 9.2-3 Ethernet communication structure ..................................................................... 9-4
List of Tables
Table 9.3-1 Generic service group numbers ........................................................................... 9-6
Table 9.3-2 Disturbance ACC numbers ................................................................................... 9-7
9 Communication
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-1 Date: 2013-05-17
9.1 General Description
This section outlines the remote communications interfaces of NR equipment. The protective
device supports a choice of three protocols via the rear communication interface (RS-485 or
Ethernet), selected via the model number by setting. The protocol provided by the protective
device is indicated in the submenu in the “Communication Settings” column. Using the keypad
and LCD, set the parameter [Protocol_RS485A] and [Protocol_RS485B], the corresponding
protocol will be selected.
The rear EIA RS-485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection of whichever
protocol is selected. The advantage of this type of connection is that up to 32 protective devices
can be “daisy chained” together using a simple twisted pair electrical connection.
It should be noted that the descriptions contained within this section do not aim to fully detail the
protocol itself. The relevant documentation for the protocol should be referred to for this
information. This section serves to describe the specific implementation of the protocol in the relay.
9.2 Rear Communication Port Information
9.2.1 RS-485 Interface
This protective device provides two rear RS-485 communication ports, and each port has three
terminals in the 12-terminal screw connector located on the back of the relay and each port has a
ground terminal for the earth shield of the communication cable. Please refer to the section of
“Communication Interface module” for details of the connection terminals. The rear ports provide
RS-485 serial data communication and are intended for use with a permanently wired connection
to a remote control center.
9.2.1.1 EIA RS-485 Standardized Bus
The EIA RS-485 two-wire connection provides a half-duplex fully isolated serial connection to the
product. The connection is polarized and whilst the product’s connection diagrams indicate the
polarization of the connection terminals it should be borne in mind that there is no agreed
definition of which terminal is which. If the master is unable to communicate with the product, and
the communication parameters match, then it is possible that the two-wire connection is reversed.
9.2.1.2 Bus Termination
The EIA RS-485 bus must have 120Ω (Ohm) ½ Watt terminating resistors fitted at either end
across the signal wires (refer to Figure 9.2-1). Some devices may be able to provide the bus
terminating resistors by different connection or configuration arrangements, in which case
separate external components will not be required. However, this product does not provide such a
facility, so if it is located at the bus terminus then an external termination resistor will be required.
9 Communication
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-2 Date: 2013-05-17
Master
Slave Slave Slave
EIA
RS
-48
5
120 Ohm
120 Ohm
Figure 9.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements
9.2.1.3 Bus Connections & Topologies
The EIA RS-485 standard requires that each device is directly connected to the physical cable that
is the communications bus. Stubs and tees are expressly forbidden, such as star topologies. Loop
bus topologies are not part of the EIA RS-485 standard and are forbidden by it also.
Two-core screened cable is recommended. The specification of the cable will be dependent on the
application, although a multi-strand 0.5mm2 per core is normally adequate. Total cable length
must not exceed 500m. The screen must be continuous and connected to ground at one end,
normally at the master connection point; it is important to avoid circulating currents, especially
when the cable runs between buildings, for both safety and noise reasons.
This product does not provide a signal ground connection. If a signal ground connection is present
in the bus cable then it must be ignored, although it must have continuity for the benefit of other
devices connected to the bus. At no stage must the signal ground be connected to the cables
screen or to the product’s chassis. This is for both safety and noise reasons.
9.2.1.4 Biasing
It may also be necessary to bias the signal wires to prevent jabber. Jabber occurs when the signal
level has an indeterminate state because the bus is not being actively driven. This can occur when
all the slaves are in receive mode and the master is slow to turn from receive mode to transmit
mode. This may be because the master purposefully waits in receive mode, or even in a high
impedance state, until it has something to transmit. Jabber causes the receiving device(s) to miss
the first bits of the first character in the packet, which results in the slave rejecting the message
and consequentially not responding. Symptoms of these are poor response times (due to retries),
increasing message error counters, erratic communications, and even a complete failure to
communicate.
Biasing requires that the signal lines be weakly pulled to a defined voltage level of about 1V. There
should only be one bias point on the bus, which is best situated at the master connection point.
The DC source used for the bias must be clean; otherwise noise will be injected. Note that some
devices may (optionally) be able to provide the bus bias, in which case external components will
not be required.
9 Communication
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-3 Date: 2013-05-17
NOTE!
It is extremely important that the 120Ω termination resistors are fitted. Failure to do so
will result in an excessive bias voltage that may damage the devices connected to the
bus.
As the field voltage is much higher than that required, NR cannot assume
responsibility for any damage that may occur to a device connected to the network as
a result of incorrect application of this voltage.
Ensure that the field voltage is not being used for other purposes (i.e. powering logic
inputs) as this may cause noise to be passed to the communication network.
9.2.2 Ethernet Interface
This protective device can provide four rear Ethernet interfaces (optional) and they are unattached
each other. Parameters of each Ethernet port can be configured in the submenu “Communication
Settings”.
9.2.2.1 Ethernet Standardized Communication Cable
It is recommended to use twisted screened eight-core cable as the communication cable. A picture
is shown bellow.
Figure 9.2-2 Ethernet communication cable
9.2.2.2 Connections and Topologies
Each device is connected with an exchanger via communication cable, and thereby it forms a star
structure network. Dual-network is recommended in order to increase reliability. SCADA is also
connected to the exchanger and will play a role of master station, so the every equipment which
has been connected to the exchanger will play a role of slave unit.
9 Communication
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-4 Date: 2013-05-17
SCADA
Ethernet Switch A
Ethernet Switch B
Equipment Equipment Equipment
Figure 9.2-3 Ethernet communication structure
9.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication
The IEC specification IEC60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5: Transmission
Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards IEC60870-5-1 to IEC60870-5-5 to perform
communication with protective device. The standard configuration for the IEC60870-5-103
protocol is to use a twisted pair EIA RS-485 connection over distances up to 500m. It also supports
to use an Ethernet connection. The relay operates as a slave in the system, responding to
commands from a master station.
To use the rear port with IEC60870-5-103 communication, the relevant settings of the protective
device must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the submenu
“Communication Settings”, set the parameters [Protocol_RS485A], [Protocol_RS485B],
[Baud_RS485A] and [Baud_RS485B]. For using the Ethernet port with IEC60870-5-103
communication, the IP address and submask of each Ethernet port can be set in the same
submenu. Please refer to the corresponding section in Chapter “Settings” for further details.
9.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port
The IEC60870-5-103 interface over serial port (RS-485) is a master/slave interface with the
protective device as the slave device. It is properly developed by NR.
The protective device conforms to compatibility level 2; compatibility level 3 is not supported.
The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:
Initialization (reset)
Time synchronization
Event record extraction
General interrogation
General functions
9 Communication
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-5 Date: 2013-05-17
Disturbance records
9.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer
Two EIA RS-485 standardized ports are available for IEC60870-5-103 in this protective device.
The transmission speed is optional: 4800 bit/s, 9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/s or 38400 bit/s.
The link layer strictly abides by the rules defined in the IEC60870-5-103.
9.3.2 Initialization
Whenever the protective device has been powered up, or if the communication parameters have
been changed, a reset command is required to initialize the communications. The protective
device will respond to either of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the difference
is that the Reset CU will clear any unsent messages in the transmit buffer.
The protective device will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5,
the COT (Cause Of Transmission) of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB
depending on the nature of the reset command.
9.3.3 Time Synchronization
The protective device time and date can be set using the time synchronization feature of the
IEC60870-5-103 protocol. The protective device will correct for the transmission delay as specified
in IEC60870-5-103. If the time synchronization message is sent as a send/confirm message then
the protective device will respond with a confirmation. Whether the time-synchronization message
is sent as a send confirmation or a broadcast (send/no reply) message, a time synchronization
class 1 event will be generated/produced.
If the protective device clock is synchronized using the IRIG-B input then it will not be possible to
set the protective device time using the IEC60870-5-103 interface. An attempt to set the time via
the interface will cause the protective device to create an event with the current date and time
taken from the IRIG-B synchronized internal clock.
9.3.4 Spontaneous Events
Events are categorized using the following information:
Type identification (TYP)
Function type (FUN)
Information number (INF)
Messages sent to substation automation system are grouped according to IEC60870-5-103
protocol. Operation elements are sent by ASDU2 (time-tagged message with relative time), and
status of binary Input and alarm element are sent by ASDU1 (time-tagged message). The cause of
transmission (COT) of these responses is 1.
1. Operation elements sent by ASDU2
2. Alarm element sent by ASDU1
9 Communication
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-6 Date: 2013-05-17
3. Binary input sent by ASDU1
Please print the IEC103 information by the menu “Print->IEC103 Info” for each specific project.
9.3.5 General Interrogation
The GI can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers, and information numbers
that will be returned during the GI cycle. The GI cycle strictly abides by the rules defined in the
IEC60870-5-103.
Refer the IEC60870-5-103 standard can get the enough details about general interrogation.
9.3.6 General Functions
The generic functions can be used to read the setting and protection measurement of the relay,
and modify the setting. Two supported type identifications are ASDU 21 and ASDU 10. For more
details about generic functions, see the IEC60870-5-103 standard.
Table 9.3-1 Generic service group numbers
Group Number Group Caption Description
001 Equip_Description
002 Trip_Element
003 Self-check_Alarm
004 Binary_Input
005 Metering
006 System Settings
007 Prot Settings
008 Function Links
009 Device Settings
010 Comm Settings
011 Label Settings
012 Setting_Group
013 Primary_Values1
014 Primary_Values2
015 Fault_Data
016 OutMap Bit Description
017 Disturbance_Info_List
018 Disturbance_Info_List
019 Disturbance_Info_List
NOTE! The above table is only an example and it will change with the differential
9 Communication
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-7 Date: 2013-05-17
protection configurations.
9.3.7 Disturbance Records
This protective device can store up to 64 disturbance records in its memory. A pickup of the fault
detector or an operation of the relay can make the protective device store the disturbance records.
The disturbance records are stored in uncompressed format and can be extracted by using the
standard mechanisms described in IEC60870-5-103.
Table 9.3-2 Disturbance ACC numbers
ACC No. Content ACC No. Content
1 Ia 3 Ic
2 Ib
9.4 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Ethernet
The IEC60870-5-103 interface over Ethernet is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave
device. It is properly developed by NR too. All the service of this relay is based on generic
functions of the IEC60870-5-103. The following table lists all the group number of this relay. And
this relay will send all the relevant information about group caption to the SAS or RTU after
establishing a successful communication link.
Please refer to Table 9.3-1 for detailed description of generic service group numbers.
9.5 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol
9.5.1 Overview
The IEC 61850 standard is the result of years of work by electric utilities and vendors of electronic
equipment to produce standardized communications systems. IEC 61850 is a series of standards
describing client/server and peer-to-peer communications, substation design and configuration,
testing, environmental and project standards. The complete set includes:
IEC 61850-1: Introduction and overview
IEC 61850-2: Glossary
IEC 61850-3: General requirements
IEC 61850-4: System and project management
IEC 61850-5: Communications and requirements for functions and device models
IEC 61850-6: Configuration description language for communication in electrical substations
related to IEDs
IEC 61850-7-1: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment -
Principles and models
IEC 61850-7-2: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment - Abstract
9 Communication
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-8 Date: 2013-05-17
communication service interface (ACSI)
IEC 61850-7-3: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment –
Common data classes
IEC 61850-7-4: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment –
Compatible logical node classes and data classes
IEC 61850-8-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Mappings to MMS (ISO
9506-1 and ISO 9506-2) and to ISO/IEC 8802-3
IEC 61850-9-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over
serial unidirectional multidrop point to point link
IEC 61850-9-2: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over
ISO/IEC 8802-3
IEC 61850-10: Conformance testing
These documents can be obtained from the IEC (http://www.iec.ch). It is strongly recommended
that all those involved with any IEC 61850 implementation obtain this document set.
9.5.2 Communication Profiles
The PCS-974 series relay supports IEC 61850 server services over TCP/IP communication
protocol stacks. The TCP/IP profile requires the PCS-974 series to have an IP address to establish
communications.
1. MMS protocol
IEC 61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper
(application) layer for transfer of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for a number
of years and provides a set of services suitable for the transfer of data within a substation LAN
environment. IEC 61850-7-2 abstract services and objects are mapped to actual MMS protocol
services in IEC61850-8-1.
2. Client/server
This is a connection-oriented type of communication. The connection and communication activity
is initiated and controlled by the client. Substation computers running HMI programs or SOE
logging software are considered as IEC61850 clients. Substation equipment such as protection
relays, meters, RTUs, transformer, tap changers, or bay control units are considered as servers.
Please note that RTUs can also be considered as clients.
3. Peer-to-peer
This is a non-connection-oriented, high speed type of communication usually between substation
equipment, such as protection relays. GOOSE is the method of peer-to-peer communication.
4. Substation configuration language (SCL)
A substation configuration language is a number of files used to describe the configuration of
substation equipment. Each configured device has an IEC Capability Description (ICD) file and a
9 Communication
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-9 Date: 2013-05-17
Configured IED Description (CID) file. The substation single line information is stored in a System
Specification Description (SSD) file. The entire substation configuration is stored in a Substation
Configuration Description (SCD) file. The SCD file is the combination of the individual ICD files
and the SSD file.
9.5.3 Server Data Organization
IEC61850 defines an object-oriented approach to data and services. An IEC61850 physical device
can contain one or more logical device(s) (for proxy). Each logical device can contain many logical
nodes. Each logical node can contain many data objects. Each data object is composed of data
attributes and data attribute components. Services are available at each level for performing
various functions, such as reading, writing, control commands, and reporting.
Each IED represents one IEC61850 physical device. The logical node LPHD contains information
about the IED physical device. The logical node LLN0 contains common information about the IED
logical device.
9.5.3.1 Digital Status Values
The GGIO logical node is available in the PCS-974 series relays to provide access to digital status
points (including general I/O inputs and warnings) and associated timestamps and quality flags.
The data content must be configured before the data can be used. GGIO provides digital status
points for access by clients. It is intended that clients use GGIO in order to access digital status
values from the PCS-974 series relays. Clients can utilize the IEC61850 buffered reporting
features available from GGIO in order to build sequence of events (SOE) logs and HMI display
screens. Buffered reporting should generally be used for SOE logs since the buffering capability
reduces the chances of missing data state changes. All needed status data objects are transmitted
to HMI clients via buffered reporting, and the corresponding buffered reporting control block
(BRCB) is defined in LLN0.
9.5.3.2 Analog Values
Most of analog measured values are available through the MMXU logical nodes, and metering
values in MMTR, the else in MMXN, MSQI and so on. Each MMXU logical node provides data
from an IED current/voltage “source”. There is one MMXU available for each configurable source.
MMXU1 provides data from CT/VT source 1(usually for protection purpose), and MMXU2 provides
data from CT/VT source 2 (usually for monitor and display purpose). All these analog data objects
are transmitted to HMI clients via unbuffered reporting periodically, and the corresponding
unbuffered reporting control block (URCB) is defined in LLN0. MMXUx logical nodes provide the
following data for each source:
MMXU.MX.Hz: frequency
MMXU. MX.PPV.phsAB: phase AB voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.PPV.phsBC: phase BC voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.PPV.phsCA: Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.PhV.phsA: phase AG voltage magnitude and angle
9 Communication
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-10 Date: 2013-05-17
MMXU.MX.PhV.phsB: phase BG voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.PhV.phsC: phase CG voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.A.phsA: phase A current magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.A.phsB: phase B current magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.A.phsC: phase C current magnitude and angle
9.5.3.3 Protection Logical Nodes
The following list describes the protection elements for all PCS-974 series relays. The specified
relay will contain a subset of protection elements from this list.
SPRT: mechanical protection
PTOC: phase overcurrent, zero sequence overcurrent and overcurrent in case of CTS
RBRF: breaker failure protection
The protection elements listed above contain start (pickup) and operate flags, instead of any
element has its own start (pickup) flag separately, all the elements share a common start (pickup)
flags “PTRC.ST.Str.general”. The operate flag for PTOC1 is “PTOC1.ST.Op.general”. For the
PCS-974 series relay protection elements, these flags take their values from related module for
the corresponding element. Similar to digital status values, the protection trip information is
reported via BRCB, and it also locates in LLN0.
9.5.3.4 LLN0 and Other Logical Nodes
Logical node LLN0 is essential for an IEC61850 based IED. This LN shall be used to address
common issues for Logical Devices. Most of the public services, the common settings, control
values and some device oriented data objects are available here. The public services may be
BRCB, URCB and GSE control blocks and similar global defines for the whole device; the
common settings include all the setting items of communication settings. System settings and
some of the protection setting items, which can be configured to two or more protection elements
(logical nodes). In LLN0, the item Loc is a device control object, this Do item indicates the local
operation for complete logical device, when it is true, all the remote control commands to the IED
will be blocked and those commands make effective until the item Loc is changed to false. In
PCS-974 series relays, besides the logical nodes we describe above, there are some other logical
nodes below in the IEDs:
MMXU: This LN shall be used to acquire values from CTs and VTs and calculate measurands
such as r.m.s. values for current and voltage or power flows out of the acquired voltage and
current samples. These values are normally used for operational purposes such as power flow
supervision and management, screen displays, state estimation, etc. The requested accuracy for
these functions has to be provided.
LPHD: Physical device information, the logical node to model common issues for physical
device.
MSQI: Positive sequence current and negative sequence current.
9 Communication
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-11 Date: 2013-05-17
PTRC: Protection trip conditioning, it shall be used to connect the “operate” outputs of one or
more protection functions to a common “trip” to be transmitted to XCBR. In addition or alternatively,
any combination of “operate” outputs of protection functions may be combined to a new “operate”
of PTRC.
RDRE: Disturbance recorder function. It triggers the fault wave recorder and its output refers
to the “IEEE Standard Format for Transient Data Exchange (COMTRADE) for Power System” (IEC
60255-24). All enabled channels are included in the recording, independently of the trigger mode.
9.5.4 Server Features and Configuration
9.5.4.1 Buffered/unbuffered Reporting
IEC61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting control blocks locate in LLN0, they can be configured
to transmit information of protection trip information (in the Protection logical nodes), binary status
values (in GGIO) and analog measured/calculated values (in MMXU, MMTR and MSQI). The
reporting control blocks can be configured in CID files, and then be sent to the IED via an
IEC61850 client. The following items can be configured.
TrgOps: Trigger options. The following bits are supported by the PCS-974 series
relays:
- Bit 1: Data-change
- Bit 4: Integrity
- Bit 5: General interrogation
OptFlds: Option Fields. The following bits are supported by the PCS-974 series relays:
- Bit 1: Sequence-number
- Bit 2: Report-time-stamp
- Bit 3: Reason-for-inclusion
- Bit 4: Data-set-name
- Bit 5: Data-reference
- Bit 6: Buffer-overflow (for buffered reports only)
- Bit 7: EntryID (for buffered reports only)
- Bit 8: Conf-revision
- Bit 9: Segmentation
IntgPd: Integrity period.
BufTm: Buffer time.
9.5.4.2 File Transfer
MMS file services are supported to allow transfer of oscillography, event record or other files from
9 Communication
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-12 Date: 2013-05-17
a PCS-974 series relay.
9.5.4.3 Timestamps
The Universal Time Coordinated (UTC for short) timestamp associated with all IEC61850 data
items represents the latest change time of either the value or quality flags of the data item
9.5.4.4 Logical Node Name Prefixes
IEC61850 specifies that each logical node can have a name with a total length of 11 characters.
The name is composed of:
A five or six-character name prefix.
A four-character standard name (for example, MMXU, GGIO, PIOC, etc.).
A one or two-character instantiation index.
Complete names are of the form xxxxxxPTOC1, where the xxxxxx character string is configurable.
Details regarding the logical node naming rules are given in IEC61850 parts 6 and 7-2. It is
recommended that a consistent naming convention be used for an entire substation project.
9.5.4.5 GOOSE Services
IEC61850 specifies the type of broadcast data transfer services: Generic Object Oriented
Substation Events (GOOSE). IEC61850 GOOSE services provide virtual LAN (VLAN) support,
Ethernet priority tagging, and Ether-type Application ID configuration. The support for VLANs and
priority tagging allows for the optimization of Ethernet network traffic. GOOSE messages can be
given a higher priority than standard Ethernet traffic, and they can be separated onto specific
VLANs. Devices that transmit GOOSE messages also function as servers. Each GOOSE
publisher contains a “GOOSE control block” to configure and control the transmission.
The GOOSE transmission (including subscribing and publishing) is controlled by GOOSE link
settings in device.
The PCS-974 series relays support IEC61850 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE)
communication. All GOOSE messages contain IEC61850 data collected into a dataset. It is this
dataset that is transferred using GOOSE message services. The GOOSE related dataset is
configured in the CID file and it is recommended that the fixed GOOSE be used for
implementations that require GOOSE data transfer between PCS-974 series relays.
IEC61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must be
correct to achieve the successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at the
transmission and reception devices are an exact match in terms of data structure, and that the
GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly.
9.5.5 ACSI conformance
9.5.5.1 ACSI Basic Conformance Statement
Services Client Server PCS-974
Client-Server Roles
9 Communication
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-13 Date: 2013-05-17
Services Client Server PCS-974
B11 Server side (of Two-party Application-Association) - C1 Y
B12 Client side (of Two-party Application-Association) C1 - N
SCSMS Supported
B21 SCSM: IEC 61850-8-1 used Y Y Y
B22 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-1 used N N N
B23 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-2 used Y N Y
B24 SCSM: other N N N
Generic Substation Event Model (GSE)
B31 Publisher side - O Y
B32 Subscriber side O - Y
Transmission Of Sampled Value Model (SVC)
B41 Publisher side - O N
B42 Subscriber side O - N
Where:
C1: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared
O: Optional
M: Mandatory
Y: Supported by PCS-974 relay
N: Currently not supported by PCS-974 relay
9.5.5.2 ACSI Models Conformance Statement
Services Client Server PCS-974
M1 Logical device C2 C2 Y
M2 Logical node C3 C3 Y
M3 Data C4 C4 Y
M4 Data set C5 C5 Y
M5 Substitution O O Y
M6 Setting group control O O Y
Reporting
M7 Buffered report control O O Y
M7-1 sequence-number Y Y Y
M7-2 report-time-stamp Y Y Y
M7-3 reason-for-inclusion Y Y Y
M7-4 data-set-name Y Y Y
9 Communication
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-14 Date: 2013-05-17
Services Client Server PCS-974
M7-5 data-reference Y Y Y
M7-6 buffer-overflow Y Y Y
M7-7 entryID Y Y Y
M7-8 BufTm N N N
M7-9 IntgPd Y Y Y
M7-10 GI Y Y Y
M8 Unbuffered report control M M Y
M8-1 sequence-number Y Y Y
M8-2 report-time-stamp Y Y Y
M8-3 reason-for-inclusion Y Y Y
M8-4 data-set-name Y Y Y
M8-5 data-reference Y Y Y
M8-6 BufTm N N N
M8-7 IntgPd N Y Y
Logging
M9 Log control O O N
M9-1 IntgPd N N N
M10 Log O O N
GSE
M12 GOOSE O O Y
M13 GSSE O O N
M14 Multicast SVC O O N
M15 Unicast SVC O O N
M16 Time M M Y
M17 File transfer O O Y
Where:
C2: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared
C3: Shall be "M" if support for DATA model has been declared
C4: Shall be "M" if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time models has
been declared
C5: Shall be "M" if support for Report, GSE, or SMV models has been declared
M: Mandatory
Y: Supported by PCS-974 relay
9 Communication
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-15 Date: 2013-05-17
N: Currently not supported by PCS-974 relay
9.5.5.3 ACSI Services Conformance Statement
Service Server/Publisher PCS-974
Server
S1 ServerDirectory M Y
Application association
S2 Associate M Y
S3 Abort M Y
S4 Release M Y
Logical device
S5 LogicalDeviceDirectory M Y
Logical node
S6 LogicalNodeDirectory M Y
S7 GetAllDataValues M Y
Data
S8 GetDataValues M Y
S9 SetDataValues M Y
S10 GetDataDirectory M Y
S11 GetDataDefinition M Y
Data set
S12 GetDataSetValues M Y
S13 SetDataSetValues O
S14 CreateDataSet O
S15 DeleteDataSet O
S16 GetDataSetDirectory M Y
Substitution
S17 SetDataValues M Y
Setting group control
S18 SelectActiveSG M/O Y
S19 SelectEditSG M/O Y
S20 SetSGValuess M/O Y
S21 ConfirmEditSGValues M/O Y
S22 GetSGValues M/O Y
S23 GetSGCBValues M/O Y
Reporting
9 Communication
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-16 Date: 2013-05-17
Service Server/Publisher PCS-974
Buffered report control block
S24 Report M Y
S24-1 data-change M Y
S24-2 qchg-change M Y
S24-3 data-update M Y
S25 GetBRCBValues M Y
S26 SetBRCBValues M Y
Unbuffered report control block
S27 Report M Y
S27-1 data-change M Y
S27-2 qchg-change M Y
S27-3 data-update M Y
S28 GetURCBValues M Y
S29 SetURCBValues M Y
Logging
Log control block
S30 GetLCBValues O
S31 SetLCBValues O
Log
S32 QueryLogByTime O
S33 QueryLogAfter O
S34 GetLogStatusValues O
Generic substation event model (GSE)
GOOSE control block
S35 SendGOOSEMessage M Y
S36 GetGoReference O
S37 GetGOOSEElementNumber O Y
S38 GetGoCBValues M Y
S39 SetGoCBValuess M Y
Control
S51 Select O
S52 SelectWithValue M Y
S53 Cancel M Y
S54 Operate M Y
S55 Command-Termination O Y
9 Communication
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-17 Date: 2013-05-17
Service Server/Publisher PCS-974
S56 TimeActivated-Operate O
File transfer
S57 GetFile M/O Y
S58 SetFile O Y
S59 DeleteFile O
S60 GetFileAttributeValues M/O Y
Time
SNTP M Y
9.5.6 Logical Nodes
9.5.6.1 Logical Nodes Table
The PCS-974 relay supports IEC61850 logical nodes as indicated in the following table. Note that
the actual instantiation of each logical node is determined by the product order code.
Nodes PCS-974
L: System Logical Nodes
LPHD: Physical device information YES
LLN0: Logical node zero YES
P: Logical Nodes For Protection Functions
PDIF: Differential -
PDIR: Direction comparison -
PDIS: Distance -
PDOP: Directional overpower -
PDUP: Directional underpower -
PFRC: Rate of change of frequency -
PHAR: Harmonic restraint -
PHIZ: Ground detector -
PIOC: Instantaneous overcurrent -
PMRI: Motor restart inhibition -
PMSS: Motor starting time supervision -
POPF: Over power factor -
PPAM: Phase angle measuring -
PSCH: Protection scheme -
PSDE: Sensitive directional earth fault -
PTEF: Transient earth fault -
PTOC: Time overcurrent YES
9 Communication
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-18 Date: 2013-05-17
Nodes PCS-974
PTOF: Overfrequency -
PTOV: Overvoltage -
PTRC: Protection trip conditioning YES
PTTR: Thermal overload -
PTUC: Undercurrent -
PTUV: Undervoltage -
PUPF: Underpower factor -
PTUF: Underfrequency -
PVOC: Voltage controlled time overcurrent -
PVPH: Volts per Hz -
PZSU: Zero speed or underspeed -
R: Logical Nodes For Protection Related Functions
RDRE: Disturbance recorder function YES
RADR: Disturbance recorder channel analogue -
RBDR: Disturbance recorder channel binary -
RDRS: Disturbance record handling -
RBRF: Breaker failure YES
RDIR: Directional element -
RFLO: Fault locator -
RPSB: Power swing detection/blocking -
RREC: Autoreclosing -
RSYN: Synchronism-check or synchronizing -
C: Logical Nodes For Control
CALH: Alarm handling -
CCGR: Cooling group control -
CILO: Interlocking -
CPOW: Point-on-wave switching -
CSWI: Switch controller -
G: Logical Nodes For Generic References
GAPC: Generic automatic process control -
GGIO: Generic process I/O YES
GSAL: Generic security application -
I: Logical Nodes For Interfacing And Archiving
IARC: Archiving -
IHMI: Human machine interface -
9 Communication
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-19 Date: 2013-05-17
Nodes PCS-974
ITCI: Telecontrol interface -
ITMI: Telemonitoring interface -
A: Logical Nodes For Automatic Control
ANCR: Neutral current regulator -
ARCO: Reactive power control -
ATCC: Automatic tap changer controller -
AVCO: Voltage control -
M: Logical Nodes For Metering And Measurement
MDIF: Differential measurements -
MHAI: Harmonics or interharmonics -
MHAN: Non phase related harmonics or interharmonic -
MMTR: Metering -
MMXN: Non phase related measurement -
MMXU: Measurement YES
MSQI: Sequence and imbalance YES
MSTA: Metering statistics -
S: Logical Nodes For Sensors And Monitoring
SARC: Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs -
SIMG: Insulation medium supervision (gas) -
SIML: Insulation medium supervision (liquid) -
SPDC: Monitoring and diagnostics for partial discharges -
X: Logical Nodes For Switchgear
TCTR: Current transformer YES
TVTR: Voltage transformer -
Y: Logical Nodes For Power Transformers
YEFN: Earth fault neutralizer (Peterson coil) -
YLTC: Tap changer -
YPSH: Power shunt -
YPTR: Power transformer -
Z: Logical Nodes For Further Power System Equipment
ZAXN: Auxiliary network -
ZBAT: Battery -
ZBSH: Bushing -
ZCAB: Power cable -
ZCAP: Capacitor bank -
9 Communication
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-20 Date: 2013-05-17
Nodes PCS-974
ZCON: Converter -
ZGEN: Generator -
ZGIL: Gas insulated line -
ZLIN: Power overhead line -
ZMOT: Motor -
ZREA: Reactor -
ZRRC: Rotating reactive component -
ZSAR: Surge arrestor -
ZTCF: Thyristor controlled frequency converter -
ZTRC: Thyristor controlled reactive component -
9.6 DNP3.0 Interface
9.6.1 Overview
The descriptions given here are intended to accompany this relay. The DNP3.0 protocol is not
described here; please refer to the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the DNP3.0
implementation. This manual only specifies which objects, variations and qualifiers are supported
in this relay, and also specifies what data is available from this relay via DNP3.0.
The relay operates as a DNP3.0 slave and supports subset level 2 of the protocol, plus some of
the features from level 3. The DNP3.0 communication uses the EIA RS-485 at the rear of this relay.
The data format is 1 start bit, 8 data bits, no parity bit and 1 stop bit.
9.6.2 Link Layer Functions
Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the linker layer functions.
9.6.3 Transport Functions
Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the transport functions.
9.6.4 Application Layer Functions
9.6.4.1 Time Synchronization
1. Time delay measurement
Master/Slave Function Code Object Variation Qualifier
Master 0x17 - - -
Slave 0x81 0x34 0x02 0x07
2. Read time of device
Master/Slave Function Code Object Variation Qualifier
9 Communication
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-21 Date: 2013-05-17
Master 0x01 0x34 0x00, 0x01 0x07
Slave 0x81 0x32 0x01 0x07
3. Write time of device
Master/Slave Function Code Object Variation Qualifier
Master 0x02 0x32 0x01 0x00,0x01,0x07,0x08
Slave 0x81 - - -
9.6.4.2 Supported Writing Functions
1. Write time of device
See Section 9.6.4.1 for the details.
2. Reset the CU (Reset IIN bit7)
Master/Slave Function Code Object Variation Qualifier
Master 0x02 0x50 0x01 0x00, 0x01
Slave 0x81 - - -
9.6.4.3 Supported Reading Functions
1. Supported qualifiers
Master Qualifier 0x00 0x01 0x06 0x07 0x08
Slave Qualifier 0x00 0x01 0x01 0x07 0x08
2. Supported objects and variations
Object 1, Binary inputs
Master Variation 0x00 0x01 0x02
Slave Variation 0x02 0x01 0x02
The protection operation signals, alarm signals and binary input state change signals are
transported respectively according to the variation sequence in above table.
Object 2, SOE
Master Variation 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03
Slave Variation 0x02 0x01 0x02 0x03
If the master qualifier is “0x07”, the slave responsive qualifier is “0x27”; and if the master
qualifier is “0x01”, “0x06” or “0x08”, the slave responsive qualifier is “0x28”.
Object 30, Analog inputs
Master Variation 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04
Slave Variation 0x01 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04
The measurement values are transported firstly, and then the relay measurement values are
transported.
9 Communication
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 9-22 Date: 2013-05-17
Object 40, Analog outputs
Master Variation 0x00 0x01 0x02
Slave Variation 0x01 0x01 0x02
The protection settings are transported in this object.
Object 50, Time Synchronization
See Section 9.6.4.1 for the details.
3. Class 0 data request
The master adopts the “Object 60” for the Class 0 data request and the variation is “0x01”.
The slave responds with the above mentioned “Object 1”, “Object 30” and “Object 40” (see
“Supported objects and variations” in Section 9.6.4.3).
4. Class 1 data request
The master adopts the “Object 60” for the Class 1 data request and the variation is “0x02”.
The slave responds with the above mentioned “Object 2” (see “Supported objects and
variations” in Section 9.6.4.3).
5. Multiple object request
The master adopts the “Object 60” for the multiple object request and the variation is “0x01”,
“0x02”, “0x03” and “0x04”.
The slave responds with the above mentioned “Object 1”, “Object 2”, “Object 30” and “Object
40” (see “Supported objects and variations” in Section 9.6.4.3).
10 Installation
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 10-a
Date: 2013-05-17
10 Installation
Table of Contents
10.1 General .......................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Safety Instructions ....................................................................................... 10-1
10.3 Checking the Shipment ................................................................................ 10-2
10.4 Material and Tools Required ........................................................................ 10-2
10.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions .................................................. 10-2
10.6 Mechanical Installation ................................................................................ 10-3
10.7 Electrical Installation and Wiring ................................................................ 10-4
10.7.1 Grounding Guidelines .................................................................................................... 10-4
10.7.2 Cubicle Grounding ......................................................................................................... 10-5
10.7.3 Ground Connection on the Device ................................................................................. 10-5
10.7.4 Grounding Strips and their Installation ........................................................................... 10-6
10.7.5 Guidelines for Wiring ..................................................................................................... 10-6
10.7.6 Wiring for Electrical Cables ............................................................................................ 10-7
Table of Figures
Figure 10.6-1 Dimensions of PCS-974FG ............................................................................. 10-3
Figure 10.6-2 Demonstration of plugging a board into its corresponding slot ................. 10-4
Figure 10.7-1 Cubicle grounding system .............................................................................. 10-5
Figure 10.7-2 Ground terminal of this relay .......................................................................... 10-6
Figure 10.7-3 Ground strip and termination ......................................................................... 10-6
Figure 10.7-4 Glancing demo about the wiring for electrical cables .................................. 10-7
10 Installation
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 10-b Date: 2013-05-17
10 Installation
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 10-1
Date: 2013-05-17
10.1 General
The equipment must be shipped, stored and installed with the greatest care.
Choose the place of installation such that the communication interface and the controls on the
front of the device are easily accessible.
Air must circulate freely around the equipment. Observe all the requirements regarding place of
installation and ambient conditions given in this instruction manual.
Take care that the external wiring is properly brought into the equipment and terminated correctly
and pay special attention to grounding. Strictly observe the corresponding guidelines contained in
this section.
10.2 Safety Instructions
Modules and units may only be replaced by correspondingly trained personnel. Always observe
the basic precautions to avoid damage due to electrostatic discharge when handling the
equipment.
In certain cases, the settings have to be configured according to the demands of the engineering
configuration after replacement. It is therefore assumed that the personnel who replace modules
and units are familiar with the use of the operator program on the service PC.
DANGER! Only insert or withdraw the PWR module while the power supply is switched
off. To this end, disconnect the power supply cable that connects with the PWR module.
WARNING! Only insert or withdraw other modules while the power supply is switched off.
WARNING! The modules may only be inserted in the slots designated in Section 6.2.
Components can be damaged or destroyed by inserting boards in the wrong slots.
DANGER! Improper handling of the equipment can cause damage or an incorrect
response of the equipment itself or the primary plant.
WARNING! Industry packs and ribbon cables may only be replaced or the positions of
jumpers be changed on a workbench appropriately designed for working on electronic
equipment. The modules, bus backplanes are sensitive to electrostatic discharge when
not in the unit's housing.
The basic precautions to guard against electrostatic discharge are as follows:
Boards have to be removed from this relay installed in a grounded cubicle in an HV
10 Installation
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 10-2 Date: 2013-05-17
switchgear installation, please discharge yourself by touching station ground (the cubicle)
beforehand.
Only hold electronic boards at the edges, taking care not to touch the components.
Only works on boards that have been removed from the cubicle on a workbench designed for
electronic equipment and wear a grounded wristband. Do not wear a grounded wristband,
however, while inserting or withdrawing units.
Always store and ship the electronic boards in their original packing. Place electronic parts in
electrostatic screened packing materials.
10.3 Checking the Shipment
Check that the consignment is complete immediately upon receipt. Notify the nearest NR
Company or agent, should departures from the delivery note, the shipping papers or the order be
found.
Visually inspect all the material when unpacking it. When there is evidence of transport damage,
lodge a claim immediately in writing with the last carrier and notify the nearest NR Company or
agent.
If the equipment is not going to be installed immediately, store all the parts in their original packing
in a clean dry place at a moderate temperature. The humidity at a maximum temperature and the
permissible storage temperature range in dry air are listed in Section 2.1.3.
10.4 Material and Tools Required
The necessary mounting kits will be provided, including screws, pincers and assembly
instructions.
A suitable drill and spanners are required to secure the cubicles to the floor using the plugs
provided (if this relay is mounted in cubicles).
10.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions
The place of installation should permit easy access especially to front of the device, i.e. to the
human machine interface of the equipment.
There should also be free access at the rear of the equipment for additions and replacement of
electronic boards.
Since every piece of technical equipment can be damaged or destroyed by inadmissible ambient
conditions, such as:
1. The location should not be exposed to excessive air pollution (dust, aggressive substances).
2. Severe vibration, extreme changes of temperature, high levels of humidity, surge voltages of
10 Installation
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 10-3
Date: 2013-05-17
high amplitude and short rise time and strong induced magnetic fields should be avoided as
far as possible.
3. Air must not be allowed to circulate freely around the equipment.
The equipment can in principle be mounted in any attitude, but it is normally mounted vertically
(visibility of markings).
WARNING! Excessively high temperature can appreciably reduce the operating life of
this relay.
10.6 Mechanical Installation
This relay is made of a single layer 8U height chassis. Following two figures show the dimensions
of this relay for reference in mounting.
(290)482.6465
10
1.6
76
.21
01
.6
35
4.8
35
6.8
+0
.4-0
10
1.6
±0.1
10
1.6
±0
.17
6.2
±0
.1
8-Ø6.8
465±0.2
451+0.4-0
Figure 10.6-1 Dimensions of PCS-974FG
10 Installation
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 10-4 Date: 2013-05-17
NOTE! It is necessary to leave enough space top and bottom of the cut-out in the cubicle
for heat emission of this relay.
The safety instructions must be abided by when installing the boards, please see Section 10.2 for
the details.
Following figure shows the installation way of a module being plugged into a corresponding slot.
Figure 10.6-2 Demonstration of plugging a board into its corresponding slot
In the case of equipment supplied in cubicles, place the cubicles on the foundations that have
been prepared. Take care while doing so not to jam or otherwise damage any of the cables that
have already been installed. Secure the cubicles to the foundations.
10.7 Electrical Installation and Wiring
10.7.1 Grounding Guidelines
Switching operations in HV installations generate transient over voltages on control signal cables.
There is also a background of electromagnetic RF fields in electrical installations that can induce
spurious currents in the devices themselves or the leads connected to them.
All these influences can influence the operation of electronic apparatus.
On the other hand, electronic apparatus can transmit interference that can disrupt the operation of
other apparatus.
In order to minimize these influences as far as possible, certain standards have to be observed
with respect to grounding, wiring and screening.
NOTE! All these precautions can only be effective if the station ground is of good quality.
10 Installation
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 10-5
Date: 2013-05-17
10.7.2 Cubicle Grounding
The cubicle must be designed and fitted out such that the impedance for RF interference of the
ground path from the electronic device to the cubicle ground terminal is as low as possible.
Metal accessories such as side plates, blanking plates etc., must be effectively connected
surface-to-surface to the grounded frame to ensure a low-impedance path to ground for RF
interference. The contact surfaces must not only conduct well, they must also be non-corroding.
NOTE! If the above conditions are not fulfilled, there is a possibility of the cubicle or parts
of it forming a resonant circuit at certain frequencies that would amplify the transmission
of interference by the devices installed and also reduce their immunity to induced
interference.
Movable parts of the cubicle such as doors (front and back) or hinged equipment frames must be
effectively grounded to the frame by three braided copper strips (see Figure 10.7-1).
The metal parts of the cubicle housing and the ground rail are interconnected electrically
conducting and corrosion proof. The contact surfaces shall be as large as possible.
NOTE! For metallic connections please observe the voltage difference of both materials
according to the electrochemical code.
The cubicle ground rail must be effectively connected to the station ground rail by a grounding strip
(braided copper).
Door or hinged
equipment frame
Cubicle ground
rail close to floor
Station
ground
Braided
copper strip
Conducting
connection
Figure 10.7-1 Cubicle grounding system
10.7.3 Ground Connection on the Device
There is a ground terminal on the rear panel, and the ground braided copper strip can be
connected with it. Take care that the grounding strip is always as short as possible. The main thing
10 Installation
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 10-6 Date: 2013-05-17
is that the device is only grounded at one point. Grounding loops from unit to unit are not allowed.
There are some ground terminals on some connectors of this relay, and the sign is “GND”. All the
ground terminals are connected in the cabinet of this relay. So, the ground terminal on the rear
panel (see Figure 10.7-2) is the only ground terminal of this device.
Figure 10.7-2 Ground terminal of this relay
10.7.4 Grounding Strips and their Installation
High frequency currents are produced by interference in the ground connections and because of
skin effect at these frequencies, only the surface region of the grounding strips is of consequence.
The grounding strips must therefore be of (preferably tinned) braided copper and not round copper
conductors, as the cross-section of round copper would have to be too large.
Proper terminations must be fitted to both ends (press/pinch fit and tinned) with a hole for bolting
them firmly to the items to be connected.
The surfaces to which the grounding strips are bolted must be electrically conducting and
non-corroding.
The following figure shows the ground strip and termination.
Braided
copper strip
Press/pinch fit
cable terminal
Terminal bolt
Contact surface
Figure 10.7-3 Ground strip and termination
10.7.5 Guidelines for Wiring
There are several types of cables that are used in the connection of this relay: braided copper
cable, serial communication cable etc. Recommendation of each cable:
Grounding: braided copper cable, 2.5mm2 ~ 6.0mm2
Power supply, binary inputs & outputs: brained copper cable, 1.5mm2 ~ 2.5mm2
AC voltage inputs: brained copper cable, 1.5mm2 ~ 2.5mm2
10 Installation
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 10-7
Date: 2013-05-17
AC current inputs: brained copper cable, 2.5mm2 ~ 6.0mm2
Serial communication: 4-core shielded braided cable
Ethernet communication: 4-pair screened twisted category 5E cable
10.7.6 Wiring for Electrical Cables
A female connector is used for connecting the wires with it, and then a female connector plugs into
a corresponding male connector that is in the front of one board. See Chapter “Hardware” for
further details about the pin defines of these connectors.
The following figure shows the glancing demo about the wiring for the electrical cables.
01 02
03 04
05 06
07
09 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
2423
2221
2019
1817
08
01
Tighten
Figure 10.7-4 Glancing demo about the wiring for electrical cables
DANGER! Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this
equipment to be opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will
produce a dangerously high voltage.
10 Installation
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 10-8 Date: 2013-05-17
11 Commissioning
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 11-a Date: 2013-05-17
11 Commissioning
Table of Contents
11.1 General .......................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Safety Instructions ....................................................................................... 11-1
11.3 Commission Tools ........................................................................................ 11-2
11.4 Setting Familiarization ................................................................................. 11-2
11.5 Product Checks ............................................................................................ 11-3
11.5.1 With the Relay De-energized .......................................................................................... 11-3
11.5.2 With the Relay Energized ................................................................................................ 11-5
11.5.3 Print Fault Report ............................................................................................................ 11-7
11.5.4 On-load Checks .............................................................................................................. 11-8
11 Commissioning
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 11-b Date: 2013-05-17
11 Commissioning
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 11-1 Date: 2013-05-17
11.1 General
This relay is fully numerical in their design, implementing all protection and non-protection
functions in software. The relay employs a high degree of self-checking and in the unlikely event of
a failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the commissioning test does not need to be as
extensive as with non-numeric electronic or electro-mechanical relays.
To commission numerical relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning
correctly and the application-specific software settings have been applied to the relay.
Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided at the end of this manual for
completion as required.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the
safety and technical data sections and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.
11.2 Safety Instructions
WARNING! Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation.
Non-observance of the safety rules can result in severe personal injury or property
damage.
WARNING! Only the qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment after
becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices of this manual as well
as with the applicable safety regulations.
Particular attention must be drawn to the following:
The earthing screw of the device must be connected solidly to the protective earth conductor
before any other electrical connection is made.
Hazardous voltages can be present on all circuits and components connected to the supply
voltage or to the measuring and test quantities.
Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after disconnection of the supply
voltage (storage capacitors!)
The limit values stated in the Chapter “Technical Data” must not be exceeded at all, not even
during testing and commissioning.
When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other
measurement quantities are connected. Take also into consideration that the trip circuits and
maybe also close commands to the circuit breakers and other primary switches are
disconnected from the device unless expressly stated.
11 Commissioning
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 11-2 Date: 2013-05-17
DANGER! Current transformer secondary circuits must have been short-circuited before
the current leads to the device are disconnected.
WARNING! Primary test may only be carried out by qualified personnel, who are familiar
with the commissioning of protection system, the operation of the plant and safety rules
and regulations (switching, earthing, etc.).
11.3 Commission Tools
Minimum equipment required:
Multifunctional dynamic current and voltage injection test set with interval timer.
Multimeter with suitable AC current range and AC/DC voltage ranges of 0~440V and 0~250V
respectively.
Continuity tester (if not included in the multimeter).
Phase angle meter.
Phase rotation meter.
NOTE! Modern test set may contain many of the above features in one unit.
Optional equipment:
An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a DC output not exceeding 500V (for
insulation resistance test when required).
A portable PC, with appropriate software (this enables the rear communications port to be
tested, if this is to be used, and will also save considerable time during commissioning).
EIA RS-485 to EIA RS-232 converter (if EIA RS-485 IEC60870-5-103 port is being tested).
PCS-974 serials dedicated protection tester HELP-9000.
11.4 Setting Familiarization
When commissioning this device for the first time, sufficient time should be allowed to become
familiar with the method by which the settings are applied. A detailed description of the menu
structure of this relay is contained in Chapter “Operation Theory” and Chapter “Settings”.
With the front cover in place all keys are accessible. All menu cells can be read. The LED
indicators and alarms can be reset. Protection or configuration settings can be changed, or fault
and event records cleared. However, menu cells will require the appropriate password to be
entered before changes can be made.
11 Commissioning
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 11-3 Date: 2013-05-17
Alternatively, if a portable PC is available together with suitable setting software (such as
PCS-9700 SAS software), the menu can be viewed one page at a time to display a full column of
data and text. This PC software also allows settings to be entered more easily, saved to a file on
disk for future reference or printed to produce a setting record. Refer to the PC software user
manual for details. If the software is being used for the first time, allow sufficient time to become
familiar with its operation.
11.5 Product Checks
These product checks cover all aspects of the relay which should be checked to ensure that it has
not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, is functioning correctly and all input quantity
measurements are within the stated tolerances.
If the application-specific settings have been applied to the relay prior to commissioning, it is
advisable to make a copy of the settings so as to allow them restoration later. This could be done
by extracting the settings from the relay itself via printer or manually creating a setting record.
11.5.1 With the Relay De-energized
This relay is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored. Commissioning tests can
be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and conjunctive tests. The function
tests are carried out according to user’s correlative regulations.
The following tests are necessary to ensure the normal operation of the equipment before it is first
put into service.
Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware
defect. Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by
self-monitoring when the DC power is supplied.
User interfaces test
Binary input circuits and output circuits test
AC input circuits test
Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based. Tests of
the protection schemes and fault locator require a dynamic test set.
Measuring elements test
Timers test
Metering and recording test
Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other
11 Commissioning
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 11-4 Date: 2013-05-17
external equipment.
On load test.
Phase sequence check and polarity check.
11.5.1.1 Visual Inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the
internal module might also have been affected, contact the vendor. The following items listed are
necessary.
Protection panel
Carefully examine the protection panel, protection equipment inside and other parts inside to
see that no physical damage has occurred since installation.
The rated information of other auxiliary protections should be checked to ensure it is correct
for the particular installation.
Panel wiring
Check the conducting wire which is used in the panel to assure that their cross section
meeting the requirement.
Carefully examine the wiring to see that they are no connection failure exists.
Label
Check all the isolator binary inputs, terminal blocks, indicators, switches and push buttons to
make sure that their labels meet the requirements of this project.
Equipment plug-in modules
Check each plug-in module of the equipment on the panel to make sure that they are well
installed into the equipment without any screw loosened.
Earthing cable
Check whether the earthing cable from the panel terminal block is safely screwed to the panel
steel sheet.
Switch, keypad, isolator binary inputs and push button
Check whether all the switches, equipment keypad, isolator binary inputs and push buttons
work normally and smoothly.
11.5.1.2 Insulation Test (if required)
Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for them to be
done and they have not been performed during installation.
Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the isolation with an electronic or brushless insulation
tester at a DC voltage not exceeding 500V, The circuits need to be tested should include:
11 Commissioning
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 11-5 Date: 2013-05-17
Current transformer circuits
DC power supply
Optic-isolated control inputs
Output contacts
Communication ports
The insulation resistance should be greater than 100MΩ at 500V.
Test method:
To unplug all the terminals sockets of this relay, and do the Insulation resistance test for each
circuit above with an electronic or brushless insulation tester.
On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected
to the protection.
11.5.1.3 External Wiring
Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant relay diagram and scheme diagram.
Ensure as far as practical that phasing/phase rotation appears to be as expected.
Check the wiring against the schematic diagram for the installation to ensure compliance with the
customer’s normal practice.
11.5.1.4 Auxiliary Power Supply
The relay only can be operated under the auxiliary power supply depending on the relay’s nominal
power supply rating.
The incoming voltage must be within the operating range specified in Section 2.1.1, before
energizing the relay, measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it within the operating range.
Other requirements to the auxiliary power supply are specified in Section 2.1.1. See this section
for further details about the parameters of the power supply.
WARNING! Energize this relay only if the power supply is within the specified operating
ranges in Section 2.1.2.
11.5.2 With the Relay Energized
The following groups of checks verify that the relay hardware and software is functioning correctly
and should be carried out with the auxiliary supply applied to the relay.
The current and voltage transformer connections must remain isolated from the relay for these
checks. The trip circuit should also remain isolated to prevent accidental operation of the
associated circuit breaker.
11.5.2.1 Front Panel LCD Display
Connect the relay to DC power supply correctly and turn the relay on. Check program version and
11 Commissioning
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 11-6 Date: 2013-05-17
forming time displayed in command menu to ensure that are corresponding to what ordered.
11.5.2.2 Date and Time
If the time and date is not being maintained by substation automation system, the date and time
should be set manually.
Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using menu item “CLOCK”.
In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a battery fitted on MON board, the time and date
will be maintained. Therefore when the auxiliary supply is restored the time and date will be correct
and not need to set again.
To test this, remove the auxiliary supply from the relay for approximately 30s. After being
re-energized, the time and date should be correct.
11.5.2.3 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
On power up, the green LED “HEALTHY” should have illuminated and stayed on indicating that
the relay is healthy.
The relay has latched signal relays which remember the state of the trip, auto-reclose when the
relay was last energized from an auxiliary supply. Therefore these indicators may also illuminate
when the auxiliary supply is applied. If any of these LEDs are on then they should be reset before
proceeding with further testing. If the LED successfully reset, the LED goes out. There is no testing
required for that that LED because it is known to be operational.
It is likely that alarms related to voltage transformer supervision will not reset at this stage.
11.5.2.4 Testing the HEALTHY and ALARM LEDs
Apply the rated DC power supply and check that the “HEALTHY” LED is lighting in green. We
need to emphasize that the “HEALTHY” LED is always lighting in operation course except that the
equipment find serious errors in it.
Produce one of the abnormal conditions listed in Chapter “Supervision”, the “ALARM” LED will
light in yellow. When abnormal condition reset, the “ALARM” LED extinguishes.
11.5.2.5 Testing the TRIP LED
The “TRIP” LED can be tested by initiating a manual circuit breaker trip from the relay. However
the “TRIP” LED will operate during the setting checks. Therefore no further testing of the “TRIP”
LED is required at this stage.
11.5.2.6 Testing the AC Current Inputs
This test verified that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.
Apply rated current to each current transformer input in turn; checking its magnitude by using a
multimeter/test set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the relays menu.
The measurement accuracy of the protection is 2.5% or 0.02In. However, an additional allowance
must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
11 Commissioning
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 11-7 Date: 2013-05-17
NOTE! The closing circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent
accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker.
Group No. Item Input Measurement (on LCD)
Value Angle Value Angle
Three-phase current
Ia
Ib
Ic
11.5.2.7 Testing the Binary Inputs
This test checks that all the binary inputs on the equipment are functioning correctly.
The binary inputs should be energized one at a time, see external connection diagrams for
terminal numbers.
Ensure that the voltage applied on the binary input must be within the operating range.
The status of each binary input can be viewed by using relay menu. Sign “1” denotes an energized
input and sign “0” denotes a de-energized input.
Binary inputs testing checkout
Terminal No. Signal Name BI Status on LCD Correct?
Test method:
To unplug all the terminals sockets of this protective device, and do the Insulation resistance test
for each circuit above with an electronic or brushless insulation tester.
On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected
to the protection.
11.5.3 Print Fault Report
In order to acquire the details of protection operation, it is convenient to print the fault report of
protection device. The printing work can be easily finished when operator presses the print button
on panel of protection device to energize binary input [BI_Print] or operate control menu. What
should be noticed is that only the latest fault report can be printed if operator presses the print
button. A complete fault report includes the content shown as follows.
1) Trip event report
2) Binary input when protection devices start
11 Commissioning
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 11-8 Date: 2013-05-17
3) Self-check and the transition of binary input in the process of devices start
4) Fault wave forms compatible with COMTRADE
5) The setting value when the protection device trips
11.5.4 On-load Checks
The objectives of the on-load checks are:
Confirm the external wiring to the current and voltage inputs is correct.
Measure the magnitude of on-load current and voltage (if applicable).
Check the polarity of each current transformer.
However, these checks can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the
tenderization of the plant being protected.
Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external wiring that has
been removed to allow testing.
If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to
perform any of the foregoing tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in
accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. Confirm current and voltage
transformer wiring.
11.5.4.1 Final Checks
After the above tests are completed, remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been
necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to perform the
wiring verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with
the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.
Ensure that the protection has been restored to service.
If the protection is in a new installation or the circuit breaker has just been maintained, the circuit
breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. If a test block is installed, remove the
test plug and replace the cover so that the protection is put into service.
Ensure that all event records, fault records, disturbance records and alarms have been cleared
and LED’s has been reset before leaving the protection.
12 Maintenance
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 12-i Date: 2013-05-17
12 Maintenance
Table of Contents
12.1 Appearance Check ...................................................................................... 12-1
12.2 Failure Tracing and Repair .......................................................................... 12-1
12.3 Replace Failed Modules .............................................................................. 12-1
12.4 Cleaning ....................................................................................................... 12-3
12.5 Storage ......................................................................................................... 12-3
12 Maintenance
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 12-ii Date: 2013-05-17
12 Maintenance
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 12-1 Date: 2013-05-17
NR numerical relay PCS-974 is designed to require no special maintenance. All measurement and
signal processing circuit are fully solid state. All input modules are also fully solid state. The output
relays are hermetically sealed.
Since the device is almost completely self-monitored, from the measuring inputs to the output
relays, hardware and software defects are automatically detected and reported. The
self-monitoring ensures the high availability of the device and generally allows for a corrective
rather than preventive maintenance strategy. Therefore, maintenance checks in short intervals are
not required.
Operation of the device is automatically blocked when a hardware failure is detected. If a problem
is detected in the external measuring circuits, the device normally only provides alarm messages.
12.1 Appearance Check
The relay case should be clean without any dust stratification. Case cover should be sealed well.
No component has any mechanical damage and distortion, and they should be firmly fixed in the
case. Relay terminals should be in good condition. The keys on the front panel with very good
feeling can be operated flexibly.
It is only allowed to plug or withdraw relay board when the supply is reliably switched off. Never
allow the CT secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be opened while the primary system
is live when withdrawing an AC module. Never try to insert or withdraw the relay board when it is
unnecessary.
Check weld spots on PCB whether they are well soldered without any rosin joint. All dual inline
components must be well plugged.
12.2 Failure Tracing and Repair
Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.
When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued and the failure is indicated on
the front panel with LED indicators and LCD display. It is also recorded in the event record.
Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the “Superv Events” screen on the LCD.
When a failure is detected during regular testing, confirm the following:
Test circuit connections are correct
Modules are securely inserted in position
Correct power supply voltage is applied
Correct analog inputs are applied
Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual
12.3 Replace Failed Modules
If the failure is identified to be in the relay module and the user has spare modules, the user can
12 Maintenance
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 12-2 Date: 2013-05-17
recover the protection by replacing the failed modules.
Repair at the site should be limited to module replacement. Maintenance at the component level is
not recommended.
Check that the replacement module has an identical module name (AI, PWR, MON, DSP, BI, BO,
etc.) and hardware type-form as the removed module. Furthermore, the MON or DSP module
replaced should have the same software version. In addition, the AI module, PWR module, BI
module, IO module and IO module replaced should have the same ratings.
The module name is indicated on the top front of the module. The software version is indicated in
LCD menu “Version Info”.
CAUTION: When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an
earthed wrist band and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise, many
of the electronic components could suffer damage. After replacing the MON or DSP
module, check the settings.
1) Replacing a module
Switch off the power supply
Disconnect the trip outputs
Short circuit all AC current inputs and disconnect all AC voltage inputs
Unscrew the module.
WARNING: Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the
DC power supply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
2) Replacing the Human Machine Interface Module (front panel)
Open the relay front panel
Unplug the ribbon cable on the front panel by pushing the catch outside.
Detach the HMI module from the relay
Attach the replacement module in the reverse procedure.
3) Replacing the AI, PWR, MON, DSP, BI, IO, BO module
Unscrew the module connector
Unplug the connector from the target module.
Unscrew the module.
Pull out the module
Inset the replacement module in the reverser procedure.
12 Maintenance
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 12-3 Date: 2013-05-17
After replacing the MON or DSP module, input the application-specific setting values again.
WARNING: Units and modules may only be replaced while the supply is switched off
and only by appropriately trained and qualified personnel. Strictly observe the basic
precautions to guard against electrostatic discharge.
WARNING: When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an
earthed wrist band and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise,
many of the electronic components could suffer damage. After replacing the MON or
DSP module, check the settings.
DANGER: After replacing modules, be sure to check that the same configuration is set
as before the replacement. If this is not the case, there is a danger of the unintended
operation of switchgear taking place or of protections not functioning correctly. Persons
may also be put in danger.
12.4 Cleaning
Before cleaning the relay, ensure that all AC/DC supplies, current transformer connections are
isolated to prevent any chance of an electric shock whilst cleaning. Use a smooth cloth to clean
the front panel. Do not use abrasive material or detergent chemicals.
12.5 Storage
The spare relay or module should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC standard
60255-1 the storage temperature should be from -40°C to 70°C, but the temperature of from 0°C
to 40°C is recommended for long-term storage.
12 Maintenance
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 12-4 Date: 2013-05-17
13 Decommissioning and Disposal
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 13-a Date: 2013-05-17
13 Decommissioning and Disposal
Table of Contents
13.1 Decommissioning ........................................................................................ 13-1
13.1.1 Switching off ................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.2 Disconnecting Cables ..................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.3 Dismantling ..................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 Disposal ........................................................................................................ 13-1
13 Decommissioning and Disposal
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 13-b
Date: 2013-05-17
13 Decommissioning and Disposal
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 13-1 Date: 2013-05-17
13.1 Decommissioning
13.1.1 Switching off
To switch off the PCS-974, switch off the external miniature circuit breaker of the power supply.
13.1.2 Disconnecting Cables
Disconnect the cables in accordance with the rules and recommendations made by relational
department.
DANGER! Before disconnecting the power supply cables that connected with the PWR
module of the PCS-974 make sure that the external miniature circuit breaker of the power
supply is switched off.
DANGER! Before disconnecting the cables that are used to connect analog input module
with the primary CTs, make sure that the primary CTs aren’t in service.
13.1.3 Dismantling
The PCS-974 rack may now be removed from the system cubicle, after which the cubicles may
also be removed.
DANGER! When the station is in operation, make sure that there is an adequate safety
distance to live parts, especially as dismantling is often performed by unskilled personnel.
13.2 Disposal
In every country there are companies specialized in the proper disposal of electronic waste.
NOTE! Strictly observe all local and national regulations when disposing of the device.
13 Decommissioning and Disposal
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 13-2
Date: 2013-05-17
14 Manual Version History
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 14-1 Date: 2013-05-17
14 Manual Version History
In the latest version of the instruction manual, several descriptions on existing features have been
modified.
Manual version and modification history records
Manual
Version Software
Version Date Description of change
Source New
1.01 2.00 PCS-974FG-R2.00 2012.10.17 Add breaker failure protection and pole disagreement
protection.
2.00 2.01 PCS-974FG-R2.00 2013.05.17
1. Update the Management Function and Mechanical
Specifications in Chapter 2.
2. Updata the Dimensions of PCS-974 in Chapter 10.
14 Manual Version History
PCS-974 Transformer Auxiliary Relay 14-2
Date: 2013-05-17
Recommended